<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" >

<channel>
	<title>Check for Updates &#8211; XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK</title>
	<atom:link href="https://www.xvraid.com/tag/check-for-updates/feed" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>https://www.xvraid.com</link>
	<description>security and surveillance blog</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Mon, 26 Aug 2024 10:29:37 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=7.1</generator>

<image>
	<url>https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/ipcam.png</url>
	<title>Check for Updates &#8211; XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK</title>
	<link>https://www.xvraid.com</link>
	<width>32</width>
	<height>32</height>
</image> 
	<item>
		<title>How To Wisenet Firmware Update</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-wisenet-firmware-update.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-wisenet-firmware-update.html#comments</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Mon, 26 Aug 2024 07:30:27 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Check for Updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Manager]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware relase]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Firmware Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[how to firmware upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[latest firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Latest version]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR Cloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Required Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[System Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrading firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wisenet]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wisenet Device Manager]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=15</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[How To Wisenet Firmware Update, Please follow these steps to update the firmware of a camera using Wisenet Device Manager. To view...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>How To Wisenet Firmware Update, Please follow these steps to update the firmware of a camera using Wisenet Device Manager.</p>
<p>To view a video showing the firmware upgrade process, <a href="https://youtu.be/Q4qDlKRFyCM" target="_blank" rel="noopener">click here</a>.</p>
<p><iframe title="Using Device Manager to Upgrade Device Firmware" width="500" height="281" src="https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q4qDlKRFyCM?feature=oembed" frameborder="0" allow="accelerometer; autoplay; clipboard-write; encrypted-media; gyroscope; picture-in-picture; web-share" referrerpolicy="strict-origin-when-cross-origin" allowfullscreen></iframe></p>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<p>1.1 Open Wisenet Device Manager from a computer connected to the same network as the camera.<br />
1.2 Click on ‘Search’.</p>
<p>2.1 Select the device<br />
2.2 Click on ‘FW’<br />
2.3 Select ‘FW Upgrade’</p>
<p>3. Click on ‘File Open’</p>
<p>Note: You can also click the &#8216;Download&#8217; button to have Wisenet Device Manager download the necessary firmware files.</p>
<p>4.1 Browse for the correct Firmware File.  Note that a downloaded firmware file is typically in a ZIP file.  You will need to first unzip the firmware file so that you can locate the .IMG file.<br />
4.2 Click on ‘Open’</p>
<p>5. Click on ‘Upgrade’</p>
<p>6.1 Wait until the Status shows “Success” and the New version of the firmware is displayed.<br />
6.2 Click on ‘Close’ to finish.</p>
<h1 class="article-title" title="VMS &amp; ONVIF Supported Device Firmware Version">VMS &amp; ONVIF Supported Device Firmware Version</h1>
<p><strong><span class="wysiwyg-font-size-large">1. VMS Supported Device Firmware Version</span></strong></p>
<p>You can search a supported device list for 3rd party VMS through the below websites.</p>
<p>&#8211; Genetec: <a href="https://www.genetec.com/supported-device-list" target="_blank" rel="noopener">https://www.genetec.com/supported-device-list</a></p>
<p>&#8211; Milestone: <a href="https://www.milestonesys.com/support/tools-and-references/supported-devices/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">https://www.milestonesys.com/support/tools-and-references/supported-devices/</a></p>
<p>&#8211; WAVE: <a href="https://wavevms.com/resources/compatible-devices/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">https://wavevms.com/resources/compatible-devices/</a></p>
<p>And, in this kind of list, you may be noticed that some specific version of firmware are listed.</p>
<p>It looks that specific version of firmware only can support for the VMS, but it is not.</p>
<p>All Hanwha cameras are basically backward compatible, so you can think of them as Latest Firmware or Higher versions can support the VMS properly.</p>
<p>Please use the latest firmware, and let us know if you have any issues with the version.</p>
<h3>How To Wisenet Firmware Update</h3>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://support.hanwhavision.eu/hc/article_attachments/7491503685532" alt="mceclip1.png" title="How To Wisenet Firmware Update 3"></p>
<p><strong><span class="wysiwyg-font-size-large">2. ONVIF Supported Device Firmware Version</span></strong></p>
<p>You can search ONVIF certification for our Wisenet Cameras through the below ONVIF website.</p>
<p>ONVIF: <a href="https://www.onvif.org/conformant-products/" target="_blank" rel="dofollow noopener">https://www.onvif.org/conformant-products/</a></p>
<p>The certified version on the list could be an older version when you are searching <a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/onvif-device-manager-review-guide-and-download.html">ONVIF</a> certification.</p>
<p>In that case, please request a new ONVIF certification for the latest version of firmware.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="https://support.hanwhavision.eu/hc/article_attachments/7491763137180" alt="mceclip2.png" title="How To Wisenet Firmware Update 4"></p>
<h3><strong>How to Security Systems Firmware Upgrade: A Comprehensive Guide</strong></h3>
<p>Learn how to perform a security systems firmware upgrade with our step-by-step guide. Ensure your security systems are up-to-date and running smoothly.</p>
<hr />
<h2><strong>Table of Contents</strong></h2>
<ol>
<li><a href="#introduction-to-security-systems-firmware" rel="noopener">Introduction to Security Systems Firmware</a></li>
<li><a href="#importance-of-firmware-upgrades-in-security-systems" rel="noopener">Importance of Firmware Upgrades in Security Systems</a></li>
<li><a href="#types-of-security-systems-that-require-firmware-upgrades" rel="noopener">Types of Security Systems That Require Firmware Upgrades</a></li>
<li><a href="#understanding-firmware-and-its-role-in-security-systems" rel="noopener">Understanding Firmware and Its Role in Security Systems</a></li>
<li><a href="#preparing-for-a-firmware-upgrade" rel="noopener">Preparing for a Firmware Upgrade</a>
<ul>
<li>5.1 Backing Up Your Security System</li>
<li>5.2 Checking the Current Firmware Version</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li><a href="#steps-to-perform-a-security-systems-firmware-upgrade" rel="noopener">Steps to Perform a Security Systems Firmware Upgrade</a>
<ul>
<li>6.1 Downloading the Latest Firmware</li>
<li>6.2 Uploading and Installing the Firmware</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li><a href="#post-upgrade-procedures" rel="noopener">Post-Upgrade Procedures</a>
<ul>
<li>7.1 Verifying the Firmware Installation</li>
<li>7.2 Restoring System Settings</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li><a href="#troubleshooting-common-issues-during-firmware-upgrade" rel="noopener">Troubleshooting Common Issues During Firmware Upgrade</a>
<ul>
<li>8.1 Firmware Update Failed</li>
<li>8.2 System Incompatibility Issues</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li><a href="#best-practices-for-maintaining-security-system-firmware" rel="noopener">Best Practices for Maintaining Security System Firmware</a></li>
<li><a href="#the-risks-of-not-updating-security-system-firmware" rel="noopener">The Risks of Not Updating Security System Firmware</a></li>
<li><a href="#how-often-should-you-update-your-security-systems-firmware" rel="noopener">How Often Should You Update Your Security Systems Firmware?</a></li>
<li><a href="#automated-firmware-updates-pros-and-cons" rel="noopener">Automated Firmware Updates: Pros and Cons</a></li>
<li><a href="#choosing-the-right-time-for-a-firmware-upgrade" rel="noopener">Choosing the Right Time for a Firmware Upgrade</a></li>
<li><a href="#faqs-on-security-systems-firmware-upgrade" rel="noopener">FAQs on Security Systems Firmware Upgrade</a></li>
<li><a href="#conclusion" rel="noopener">Conclusion</a></li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2><strong>1. Introduction to Security Systems Firmware</strong></h2>
<p>Firmware is the backbone of any security system, acting as the bridge between the hardware and software components. It controls the system’s fundamental operations and ensures that all parts function harmoniously. Understanding what firmware is and its significance is crucial before diving into the upgrade process.</p>
<h2><strong>2. Importance of Firmware Upgrades in Security Systems</strong></h2>
<p>Upgrading your security system’s firmware is not just about keeping up with technology; it’s about ensuring your system’s integrity, performance, and security. Firmware updates often come with patches for vulnerabilities, new features, and improved compatibility, making them essential for maintaining robust security.</p>
<h2><strong>3. Types of Security Systems That Require Firmware Upgrades</strong></h2>
<p>Various security systems, including surveillance cameras, alarm systems, access control systems, and home automation devices, require regular firmware updates. Each of these systems relies on firmware to operate efficiently and securely.</p>
<h2><strong>4. Understanding Firmware and Its Role in Security Systems</strong></h2>
<p>Firmware is embedded software programmed directly into the hardware of a security system. It dictates how the system behaves, processes data, and communicates with other devices. Without regular updates, firmware can become outdated, leaving your security system vulnerable to new threats and inefficiencies.</p>
<h2><strong>5. Preparing for a Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>
<p>Before starting the upgrade process, preparation is key. This involves several steps that ensure the system is ready for the new firmware.</p>
<h3><strong>5.1 Backing Up Your Security System</strong></h3>
<p>Always back up your system settings and data before initiating an upgrade. This precautionary step ensures that you can restore your system to its previous state if something goes wrong during the update.</p>
<h3><strong>5.2 Checking the Current Firmware Version</strong></h3>
<p>Knowing the current firmware version helps you determine whether an upgrade is necessary. Most systems allow you to check the firmware version through the system’s interface or accompanying software.</p>
<h2><strong>6. Steps to Perform a Security Systems Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>
<p>Upgrading the firmware of your security system can seem daunting, but following these steps can simplify the process.</p>
<h3><strong>6.1 Downloading the Latest Firmware</strong></h3>
<p>First, visit the manufacturer’s website or use the system’s software to download the latest firmware version. Ensure the firmware is compatible with your specific model.</p>
<h3><strong>6.2 Uploading and Installing the Firmware</strong></h3>
<p>Once downloaded, upload the firmware to your security system via a USB drive, SD card, or through a network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the update, and avoid interrupting the process to prevent errors.</p>
<h2><strong>7. Post-Upgrade Procedures</strong></h2>
<p>After successfully installing the firmware, some post-upgrade steps ensure everything is running smoothly.</p>
<h3><strong>7.1 Verifying the Firmware Installation</strong></h3>
<p>Check the system’s firmware version again to confirm that the update was successful. If the new version is displayed, your upgrade is complete.</p>
<h3><strong>7.2 Restoring System Settings</strong></h3>
<p>If the upgrade reset any settings, restore them from your backup. This step ensures your system functions as expected with the new firmware.</p>
<h2><strong>8. Troubleshooting Common Issues During Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>
<p>Sometimes, things don’t go as planned. Here’s how to troubleshoot common problems during a firmware upgrade.</p>
<h3><strong>8.1 Firmware Update Failed</strong></h3>
<p>If the update fails, restart the system and try again. Ensure that the firmware file is not corrupted and is compatible with your system.</p>
<h3><strong>8.2 System Incompatibility Issues</strong></h3>
<p>Incompatibility issues can arise if the wrong firmware version is installed. Double-check the firmware version and the model of your security system to avoid this issue.</p>
<h2><strong>9. Best Practices for Maintaining Security System Firmware</strong></h2>
<p>To keep your security system running optimally, follow these best practices for maintaining firmware.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Regularly Check for Updates:</strong> Set a reminder to check for firmware updates every few months.</li>
<li><strong>Enable Notifications:</strong> Some systems allow you to enable notifications for new firmware releases.</li>
<li><strong>Test System After Update:</strong> Always test your security system after a firmware update to ensure all components are functioning correctly.</li>
</ul>
<h2><strong>10. The Risks of Not Updating Security System Firmware</strong></h2>
<p>Failing to update your security system’s firmware can lead to several risks, including:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Security Vulnerabilities:</strong> Hackers often exploit outdated firmware to gain unauthorized access.</li>
<li><strong>Reduced System Performance:</strong> Over time, outdated firmware can slow down your security system.</li>
<li><strong>Loss of New Features:</strong> Manufacturers often add new features to firmware updates, which you’ll miss out on if you don’t upgrade.</li>
</ul>
<h2><strong>11. How Often Should You Update Your Security Systems Firmware?</strong></h2>
<p>There’s no one-size-fits-all answer, but as a rule of thumb, check for updates at least twice a year or whenever the manufacturer releases a new version. This ensures your system remains secure and up-to-date.</p>
<h2><strong>12. Automated Firmware Updates: Pros and Cons</strong></h2>
<p>Many modern security systems offer automated firmware updates, but this feature comes with both advantages and disadvantages.</p>
<h3><strong>Pros:</strong></h3>
<ul>
<li><strong>Convenience:</strong> Updates are installed automatically without manual intervention.</li>
<li><strong>Timeliness:</strong> Your system stays updated without delay.</li>
</ul>
<h3><strong>Cons:</strong></h3>
<ul>
<li><strong>Lack of Control:</strong> You may not have the opportunity to back up settings before the update.</li>
<li><strong>Potential Downtime:</strong> Automated updates can occur at inconvenient times, potentially disrupting your system’s operation.</li>
</ul>
<h2><strong>13. Choosing the Right Time for a Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>
<p>Timing is crucial when performing a firmware upgrade. Choose a time when your security system’s downtime will have the least impact, such as during off-hours or when the premises are unoccupied.</p>
<h2><strong>14. FAQs on Security Systems Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>
<h3><strong>1. What is firmware in a security system?</strong></h3>
<p>Firmware is a type of software embedded into the hardware of a security system, controlling its basic operations and functions.</p>
<h3><strong>2. How do I know if my security system needs a firmware update?</strong></h3>
<p>You can usually check for firmware updates via the system’s interface or the manufacturer’s website. If your system is experiencing performance issues, it might be time for an update.</p>
<h3><strong>3. Can I revert to the previous firmware version if something goes wrong?</strong></h3>
<p>Some systems allow you to revert to the previous firmware version, but this is not always possible. Always back up your system before upgrading.</p>
<h3><strong>4. Will a firmware upgrade affect my system’s settings?</strong></h3>
<p>In some cases, a firmware upgrade may reset your system’s settings. It’s important to back up your settings before performing an upgrade.</p>
<h3><strong>5. How long does a firmware upgrade take?</strong></h3>
<p>The duration of a firmware upgrade varies depending on the system, but it usually takes anywhere from a few minutes to an hour.</p>
<h3><strong>6. Are firmware upgrades free?</strong></h3>
<p>Most manufacturers provide firmware updates for free as part of their ongoing support for the product.</p>
<h2><strong>15. Conclusion</strong></h2>
<p>Upgrading the firmware of your security system is an essential task that ensures your system remains secure, efficient, and equipped with the latest features. By following the steps outlined in this guide, you can confidently perform a firmware upgrade and maintain the integrity of your security systems.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-wisenet-firmware-update.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>5</slash:comments>
		
		
		<media:content url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q4qDlKRFyCM" medium="video">
			<media:player url="https://www.youtube.com/embed/Q4qDlKRFyCM" />
			<media:title type="plain">Check for Updates - XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK</media:title>
			<media:description type="html"><![CDATA[Auf YouTube findest du die angesagtesten Videos und Tracks. Außerdem kannst du eigene Inhalte hochladen und mit Freunden oder gleich der ganzen Welt teilen.]]></media:description>
			<media:thumbnail url="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/wisenet-firmware-update.jpg" />
			<media:rating scheme="urn:simple">nonadult</media:rating>
		</media:content>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 28 Jul 2023 18:39:42 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[4G Solar Camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[app]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Check for Updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Client Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Configuration]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Initialization]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Manager]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[DVR user]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Eseecloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Face Detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Forgot Password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[hilook]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[installation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instructions]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ios]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[IP cameras]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Latest version]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[mobile]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[motion detection]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[network setting]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[phone]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz activation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ptz control]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Remote Access]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[reset the password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Software]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[surveillance]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[System Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[User Manual]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[View interface]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wireless]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=2037</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide, CP Plus has introduced the new and impactful range of DVRs under the Lite Series which...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide, CP Plus has introduced the new and impactful range of DVRs under the Lite Series which has been integrated with the 4K and H.265 encoding technology that provides you with an outstanding at a reasonably pocket-friendly price.</p>
<p>The 4K resolution processors present in this product help in bringing out every little detail in the image.</p>
<p>Along with that, this <a href="https://www.cpplusworld.com/cp-uvr-0401f1-ic" rel="dofollow noopener" target="_blank">DVR</a> uses the intuitive shortcut operation menu which lets you control and manage the system remotely as well and can work as edge storage, central storage, backup storage .</p>
<h2>CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide</h2>
<p>Read Next :</p>
<ol>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/software/juan-cctv-firmware-software-new.html" rel="nofollow">JUAN CCTV Firmware Software NEW</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/eseecloud-4g-solar-camera-guide.html" rel="nofollow">Eseecloud 4G Solar Camera Guide</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/hilook-dvr-user-manual.html" rel="nofollow">Hilook DVR User Manual</a></li>
</ol>
<p>&nbsp;</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark0"></a> Introduction
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark2"></a> Overview</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>The Device is an excellent digital monitor product for security industry. The embedded LINUX OS assures the stable operation. The H.264 and G.711 technologies assure the high-quality image and low bit stream. The frame-by-frame play function displays more details for analysis, and provides the functions such as record, playback, and monitor and assures the synchronization for audio and video. The Device also adopts the advanced control technology and great network data transmission capability.</p>
<p>The Device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability. It can work in the local end and, with strong networking capability it can get connected to the professional surveillance software (Smart PSS) to form a security network to show its powerful remote monitoring function.</p>
<p>The Device is applicable to the areas such as bank, telecom, electricity, traffic, intelligent residential district, factory, warehouse, resources, and water conservancy facilities.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark4"></a> Functions</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The functions might be different depending on the software and hardware version of the model you purchased.</p>
<p><strong>Real-time Surveillance</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support VGA port and HDMI port to realize the surveillance through monitors.</li>
<li>Support HDMI, VGA, and TV output at the same time.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>IoT Management</strong></p>
<p>Provide specific management module for IoT features including humidity and temperature data reports and alarms linkage.</p>
<p><strong>Sensor Integration</strong></p>
<p>Integrate coaxial cameras with diverse array of sensors such as temperature, humidity and wireless alarm devices.</p>
<p><strong>Storage Management</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Special data format to guarantee data security and avoid the risk of modifying data viciously.</li>
<li>Support digital watermark.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Compression Format</strong></p>
<p>Support multiple-channel audio and video signal. An independent hardware decodes the audio and video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization.</p>
<p><strong>Backup Function</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support backup operation through USB port (such as USB storage disk, portable HDD, and burner).</li>
<li>Client-end user can download the file from local HDD through network to backup.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Record &amp; Playback</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support each channel real-time record independently, and simultaneously support the functions such as search, backward play, network monitor, record search, and download.</li>
<li>Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.</li>
<li>Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time.</li>
<li>Support zooming in the selected area in the live view.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Network Operation</strong></p>
<p>Support network remote real-time monitor, remote record search and remote PTZ control.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm Activation</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on-site light control.</li>
<li>The alarm input port and output port have the protection circuit to guarantee the Device safety.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Communication Port</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>RS485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control.</li>
<li>RS232 port can connect to keyboard, COM port of PC or the matrix control.</li>
<li>Standard Ethernet port can realize network remote access function.</li>
<li>The dual-network port has the multiple-address, fault tolerance, load balance setup mode.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>PTZ Control</strong></p>
<p>Support PTZ decoder through RS485 port.</p>
<p><strong>Intelligent Operation</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Support mouse operation function.</li>
<li>Support &#8220;copy and paste&#8221; function for the same settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)</strong></p>
<p>Establish mapping connection between LAN and WAN through UPnP protocol.</p>
<p><strong>Camera Self-adaptive</strong></p>
<p>Auto-recognize and work with the PAL or NTSC camera and HD camera.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark6"></a> Getting Started
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark8"></a> Checking the Components</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
<p>When you receive the Device, please check against the following checking list. If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales engineer immediately.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Sequence</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Checking items</strong></td>
<td><strong>Requirement</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">1</td>
<td rowspan="2">Package</td>
<td>Appearance</td>
<td>No obvious damage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Packing materials</td>
<td>No broken or distorted positions that could be caused by hit.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Not torn up. EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Do not tear up or throw away the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">2</td>
<td rowspan="2">Labels</td>
<td rowspan="2">Labels on the device</td>
<td>labels; otherwise the warranty</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>services are not ensured. You need</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>to provide the serial number of the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>product when you call the after-sales service.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">3</td>
<td rowspan="2">Device</td>
<td>Appearance</td>
<td>No obvious damage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data cables, power cables, fan cables, mainboard</td>
<td>No connection loose.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark10"></a> Installing HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please check if the HDD is already installed in the Device when you first time using the Device.</p>
<p>It is suggested to use the HDD recommended officially. Do not use the PC HDD.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2038" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-1.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 1" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 360"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you open the case to replace the HDD.</p>
<p><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" width="276" height="205" class="wp-image-2039" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-2.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 2" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 361"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="272" height="215" class="wp-image-2040" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-3.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 3" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 362"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="187" class="wp-image-2041" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-4.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 4" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 363"></p>
<p>1. Remove the screws to<br />
take off the cover.</p>
<p>2.</p>
<p>Fix the screws on the HDD but do not fasten them.</p>
<ol>
<li>Match the screws with the holes on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) (WITHOUT HDD) to place the HDD.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="242" height="191" class="wp-image-2042" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-5.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 5" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 364"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="280" height="188" class="wp-image-2043" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-6.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 6" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 365"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="237" height="213" class="wp-image-2044" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-7.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 7" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 366"></p>
<ol>
<li>Turn the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) upside down to see the screws and then</li>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and<br />
fasten the screws.</li>
</ol>
<p>fasten them.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark12"></a> 2.2.2 E Model</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark14"></a> Installing Battery</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The battery is only provided with some models.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="414" height="295" class="wp-image-2045" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 8" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 367" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8.jpeg 414w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-8-300x214.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 414px) 100vw, 414px" /></p>
<p>1. Put the battery cable through the hole.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="415" height="301" class="wp-image-2046" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 9" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 368" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9.jpeg 415w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-9-300x218.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 415px) 100vw, 415px" /></p>
<p>2. Connect to the cable into the port.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark16"></a> Installing HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Skip step 6 if the battery is not equipped with the model you purchased.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="175" class="wp-image-2047" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-10.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 10" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 369"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="170" class="wp-image-2048" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-11.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 11" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 370"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="176" class="wp-image-2049" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 12" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 371" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12.jpeg 256w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-12-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 256px) 100vw, 256px" /></p>
<p>1. Remove the screws to 2.</p>
<p>take off the cover.</p>
<p>Remove the screws to 3.</p>
<p>Put the HDD onto the bracket.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="182" class="wp-image-2050" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-13.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 13" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 372"></p>
<p>take off the bracket.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="179" class="wp-image-2051" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-14.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 14" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 373"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="185" class="wp-image-2052" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-15.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 15" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 374"></p>
<p>4. Match the holes on the</p>
<p>5. Use screws to fix the</p>
<p>6.</p>
<p>bracket with the screw</p>
<p>HDD onto the bracket.</p>
<p>holes on HDD.</p>
<p>(Optional) Put the battery cable through the hole to connect into the cable port.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="292" height="185" class="wp-image-2053" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-16.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 16" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 375"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="176" class="wp-image-2054" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-17.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 17" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 376"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="167" class="wp-image-2055" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-18.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 18" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 377"></p>
<ol>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Install the bracket back and then fasten the screws.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and fasten the screws.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark18"></a> MINI 1U and Compact 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="286" height="176" class="wp-image-2056" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-19.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 19" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 378"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="285" height="226" class="wp-image-2057" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-20.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 20" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 379"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="214" class="wp-image-2058" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-21.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 21" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 380"></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the screws on the rear panel.</li>
<li>Fix the screws on the</li>
<li>Place the HDD onto</li>
</ol>
<p>HDD but do not be</p>
<p>the Device.</p>
<p>fastened.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="906" height="190" class="wp-image-2059" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 22" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 381" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22.jpeg 906w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-300x63.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-768x161.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-22-810x170.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 906px) 100vw, 906px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the holes on the back of the device and fix the screws.</li>
<li>Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</li>
<li>Put back the cover and fix the screws.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark20"></a> 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="171" class="wp-image-2060" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-23.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 23" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 382"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="215" class="wp-image-2061" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-24.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 24" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 383"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="295" height="205" class="wp-image-2062" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 25" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 384" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25.jpeg 295w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-25-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 295px) 100vw, 295px" /></p>
<ol>
<li>Remove the screws on</li>
<li>Fix the screws onto the</li>
<li>Put the HDD into the</li>
</ol>
<p>the cover.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="290" height="219" class="wp-image-2063" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-26.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 26" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 385"></p>
<p>4. Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the</p>
<p>HDD, but do not be Device.</p>
<p>fastened.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="290" height="219" class="wp-image-2064" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-27.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 27" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 386"></p>
<p>5. Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="284" height="154" class="wp-image-2065" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-28.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 28" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 387"></p>
<p>6. Put back the cover and fix the screws.</p>
<p>holes on the back of the</p>
<p>device, and then fix the</p>
<p>screws.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark22"></a> 3 Installing Device into Rack</li>
</ol>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Only 1.5U and 2U Devices support this installation.</p>
<p>To install the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) into Rack, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Check if the in-house temperature is lower than 35°C(95T) and make sure the 15cm (6in.) spacing around the Device for ventilation.</p>
<p>Step 1 Use six screws to fix the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) on each side.</p>
<p>Step 2 Install from the bottom up.</p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>If you want to install more accessories to the rack, take preventive measures to avoid power socket overload.</p>
<p>Step 3 Install more accessories to the rack if needed.</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark24"></a> General Details</li>
</ol>
<p>This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark26"></a> Front Panel</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark28"></a> .1 Smart 1U</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="157" height="132" class="wp-image-2066" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-29.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 29" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 388"></p>
<p>Figure 3-1</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>0</td>
<td>HDD status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the HDD is running normally.</li>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in</li>
</ul>
<p>malfunction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>©</td>
<td>Power status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the power is connected</li>
</ul>
<p>abnormally.</p>
<ul>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the power is connected</li>
</ul>
<p>normally.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Network status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>The indicator is off when the network connection is</li>
</ul>
<p>correct.</p>
<ul>
<li>The indicator glows blue when the network connection</li>
</ul>
<p>is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark30"></a> 3.1.2 E Model</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1 I</td>
<td></td>
<td>2</td>
<td>3</td>
<td>1</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>5 7</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ □ □ e</td>
<td>A</td>
<td>□ □</td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td>1 □ 1</td>
<td>i □ n n d □ □□□ □□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□! □□□□□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□ □ □</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ □ □</strong></td>
<td>©</td>
<td></td>
<td>3 »</td>
<td>!»</td>
<td>■I</td>
<td></td>
<td>□ n n □ □□□□□ ei □□□ ei □□□ □ □□ r ^<sub>1</sub><sup>LJLJ</sup>A&#8217; i □ ei □ □</p>
<p>• □□ □□□□□ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □□□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>□ □ </strong>□ □ □ e</li>
<li>□ □ e</li>
<li>□ □ E</li>
<li><strong>□ □ C</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>□ □ □ E</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ D □</strong></p>
<p>□ □ □ E</p>
<p>□ DDE</p>
<p><strong>□ □ □</strong></p>
<p><strong>□ □ □ E</strong></td>
<td colspan="2">□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ O El □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □ □ □</td>
<td>□ □</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□</p>
<p>□ □</p>
<p>□</td>
<td colspan="3">□ □ □ □ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ nr</p>
<p>□ □ □ □</p>
<p>c □ □ □ [</p>
<p>□ □ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □</p>
<p>□ □ □ nr</p>
<ul>
<li>□ □ □</li>
<li>□ □</li>
</ul>
<p>□ □ □ □</td>
<td>inn □ nun onn □□□ □ onn n □□□ □ nnn n uu</p>
<p>□ □ODD □□□□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ D El □ □ El El □</p>
<p>□ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ ei □ ei □ □ nnn</p>
<p>□ □□□ □ □ □ □□ El □ □ □ □ □□□ El HDD □ □ El EI □</p>
<p>□ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ C □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □□□</p>
<ul>
<li>□□□□ □□□□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ o □ □</li>
</ul>
<p>inn o □□□ □□□ □□□ □ □□□ □ nnn □ non □ □□ □ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □ □ n □ □ □□□□□ ei □ □ □ □ □□□ □ nnn □ □ ei □ □ □ ei □□□ □ □□□ □ □ □ ei □ □□□ □ □ □ □ nun ei □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ nnn e □□□ □ uu</p>
<ul>
<li>□□□□ □□□ □□□ □ □ □ □ □ o o □ □ □ □□non □ □ □ Q □</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 3-2</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Button/Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>POWER</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD). The indicator glows blue when the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is turned on.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>HDD status indicator</td>
<td>The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in malfunction.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Network status indicator</td>
<td>The indicator glows blue when the network connection is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4,5,6</td>
<td>Battery status indicator</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains full or no less than sixty percent,</li>
</ul>
<p>the No.4 indicator is on, and the No.5 and No.6 are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains between thirty percent and sixty</li>
</ul>
<p>percent, the No.5 indicator is on and the others are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery remains between one percent and thirty</li>
</ul>
<p>percent, the No.6 indicator is on and the others are out.</p>
<ul>
<li>When the battery is exhausted, the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is</li>
</ul>
<p>turned off, or there is no battery attached to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), all the three indicators are out.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark32"></a> 3.1.3 Compact 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="111" class="wp-image-2067" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 30" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 389" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30.jpeg 624w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-30-300x53.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-3</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>Glows blue when HDD status is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>NET</td>
<td>Glows blue when network status is abnormal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>POWER</td>
<td>Glows blue when the power is connected properly.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-3</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark34"></a> 3.1.4 MINI 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="612" height="180" class="wp-image-2068" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 31" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 390" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31.jpeg 612w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-31-300x88.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 612px) 100vw, 612px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="99" height="23" class="wp-image-2069" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-32.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 32" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 391"></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Icon</td>
<td>Function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Power button</td>
<td><strong>0</strong></td>
<td>Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Up Down</td>
<td rowspan="3"><strong>A, ▼</strong></td>
<td>Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Increase/decrease numeral.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Assistant function such as PTZ menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Left</p>
<p>Right</td>
<td rowspan="2"><strong>◄ ►</strong></td>
<td>Shift current activated control,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td>Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Enter</td>
<td rowspan="3">ENTER</td>
<td>Confirm current operation</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to default button</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="5">Assistant</td>
<td rowspan="5">Fn</td>
<td>One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant <s> funct</s>i<s>on: PTZ contro</s>l <s>and</s> i<s>man</s>e <s>co</s>l<s>or </s></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Realize other special functions.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>USB port</td>
<td></td>
<td>To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network abnormal indication light</td>
<td>Net</td>
<td>Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD abnormal</p>
<p>indication light</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IR Receiver</td>
<td>IR</td>
<td>It is to receive the signal from the remote control.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark36"></a> 3.1.5 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="170" class="wp-image-2070" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 33" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 392" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33.jpeg 633w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-33-300x81.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-5</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Icon</td>
<td>Function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Power button</td>
<td><strong>o</strong></td>
<td>Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Up Down</td>
<td rowspan="3"><strong>A, ▼</strong></td>
<td>Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Increase/decrease numeral.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Assistant function such as PTZ menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Left</p>
<p>Right</td>
<td rowspan="2"><strong>◄ ►</strong></td>
<td>Shift current activated control,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td rowspan="2">ESC</td>
<td>Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Enter</td>
<td rowspan="3">ENTER</td>
<td>Confirm current operation</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to default button</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Go to menu</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Slow play</td>
<td><strong>h</strong></td>
<td>Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Assistant</td>
<td rowspan="2">Fn</td>
<td>One-window monitor mode, click this button to display <s> ass</s>i<s>stant funct</s>i<s>on: pt</s><sub><s>7</s></sub><s> contro</s>l <s>and</s> i<s>man</s>e <s>co</s>l<s>or </s></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3"></td>
<td rowspan="3"></td>
<td>In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Realize other special functions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>USB port</td>
<td></td>
<td>To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network abnormal indication</td>
<td>Net</td>
<td>Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD abnormal indication l^ht</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td>HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IR Receiver</td>
<td>IR</td>
<td>It is to receive the signal from the remote control.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-4</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark38"></a> 3.2 Rear Panel</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark40"></a> 3.2.1 Smart 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="228" class="wp-image-2071" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 34" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 393" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-300x83.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-768x211.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-34-810x223.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-6</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-5</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark42"></a> 3.2.2 E Model</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="311" class="wp-image-2072" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 35" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 394" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-300x113.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-768x289.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-35-810x305.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-7</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="313" class="wp-image-2073" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 36" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 395" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-300x114.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-768x291.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-36-810x307.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-8</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7, 8</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Power output port</td>
<td>Outputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Ground</td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-6</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark44"></a> 3.2.3 Compact 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="188" class="wp-image-2074" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 37" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 396" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-300x68.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-768x175.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-37-810x184.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-9</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-7</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark46"></a> 3.2.4 MINI 1 U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="229" class="wp-image-2075" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 38" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 397" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-300x83.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-768x213.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-38-810x224.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-10</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">1</td>
<td>Alarm input port 1-16</td>
<td>4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close).</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the Device have the same ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3;</p>
<p>C1-C3)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>3 groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port NO1-C1,</li>
</ul>
<p>Group 2: port NO2-C2, Group 3: port NO3-C3). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device.</p>
<ul>
<li>NO: Normal open alarm output port.</li>
<li>C: Alarm output public end.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>J_</td>
<td>Ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input port 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>DB25 port</td>
<td>Connects to the audio splitter taken from the package to convert to audio input port which receives the audio signal from devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input ports 2-16.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use a cable tie to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) to prevent loss.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-8</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark48"></a> 3.2.5 1U</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="209" class="wp-image-2076" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 39" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 398" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-300x76.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-768x194.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-39-810x205.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-11</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td><strong>©</strong></td>
<td>Ground terminal.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">2</td>
<td>Alarm input port 1-16</td>
<td>4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close).</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</p>
<p>When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) connect to the same ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3;</p>
<p>C1-C3)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1-</li>
</ul>
<p>C1,Group 2:port NO2-C2,Group 3:port NO3-C3) ). These</p>
<p>ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device.</p>
<ul>
<li>NO : Normal open alarm output port.</li>
<li>C : Alarm output public end.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Ground.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Video input port</td>
<td>Connects to analog camera to input video signal.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Port Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Audio input port</td>
<td>Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Audio output port</td>
<td>Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>HDMI port</td>
<td>High definition audio and video signal output port.</p>
<p>The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>USB port</td>
<td>Connects to the external devices such as keyboard, mouse, and USB storage device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Network port</td>
<td>Connects to Ethernet port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>RS485 communication port</td>
<td>Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Power input port</td>
<td>Inputs DC 12V power.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>VGA port</td>
<td>Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Power cable fastener</td>
<td>Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-9</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark50"></a> Remote Control Operations</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Please note the remote control is not our standard accessory and might not be included in the</p>
<p>accessary bag. It is supplied dependent on the model you purchased.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="532" height="634" class="wp-image-2077" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 40" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 399" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40.jpeg 532w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-40-252x300.jpeg 252w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 532px) 100vw, 532px" /></p>
<p>Figure 3-12</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Power button</td>
<td>Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Address</td>
<td>Press this button to input device serial number, so that you can control the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Forward</td>
<td>Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Slow motion</td>
<td>Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Next record</td>
<td>In playback state, press this button to play back the next video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Previous record</td>
<td>In playback state, press this button to play back the previous video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>Play/Pause</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>In normal playback state, press this button to pause</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>In pause state, press this button to resume to normal</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>In live view window interface, press this button to enter video</li>
</ul>
<p>search menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">8</td>
<td rowspan="2">Reverse/pause</td>
<td>In the reverse playback state, press this button to pause reverse playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In the reverse playback pause state, press this button to resume to playback reversing state.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>9</td>
<td>Esc.</td>
<td>Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation (close front interface or control).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Record</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Start or stop record manually.</li>
<li>In record interface, use the direction buttons to select the</li>
</ul>
<p>channel that you want to record.</p>
<ul>
<li>Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the manual</li>
</ul>
<p>record interface will be displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Direction keys</td>
<td>Switch between current activated controls by going left or right. In playback state, the keys control the playback progress bar. Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>Enter/menu key</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Confirms an operation.</li>
<li>Go to the <strong>OK </strong>button.</li>
<li>Go to the menu.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Multiple-window switch</td>
<td>Switch between multiple-window and one-window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td>Fn</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>In single-channel monitoring mode, press this button to</li>
</ul>
<p>display the PTZ control and color setting functions.</p>
<ul>
<li>Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control interface.</li>
<li>In motion detection interface, press this button with direction</li>
</ul>
<p>keys to complete setup.</p>
<ul>
<li>In text mode, press and hold this button to delete the last</li>
</ul>
<p>character. To use the clearing function: Long press this button for 1.5 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and other</li>
</ul>
<p>information (as indicated in the pop-up message.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>15</td>
<td>Alphanumeric keys</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Input password, numbers.</li>
<li>Switch channel.</li>
<li>Press Shift to switch the input method.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 3-10</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark52"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark53"></a> Mouse Operations</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Q3 NOTE</p>
<p>The operations are based on the considerations for right-handed users.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Operation</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="6">Click left mouse button</td>
<td>Password input dialogue box pops up if you have not logged in yet. In live view window interface, you can go to the main menu.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>When you have selected one menu item, click it to view menu content.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Implement the control operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Modify checkbox or motion detection status.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Click combo box to pop up drop-down list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>In text box, click the corresponding button on the panel to enter a numeral or English character (small/capitalized).</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>In English input mode: Click =1 to enter a backspace and click a</p>
<p><strong>Operation</strong></p>
<p><strong>Function</strong></p>
<p>to delete the previous character.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="125" class="wp-image-2078" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 41" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 400" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-41-300x63.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>In numeral input mode: Click =1 to clear and click a to delete</p>
<p>the previous character.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="134" height="135" class="wp-image-2079" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-42.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 42" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 401"></p>
<p>Double-click left</p>
<p>mouse button</p>
<p>Right-click</p>
<p>Implement special control operations such as double-click one item in the file list to play back the video.</p>
<p>In multiple-window mode, double-click one channel to view in full-window. Double-click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window mode.</p>
<p>Right-click in live view window interface, the shortcut menu is displayed. For different series product, the shortcut menu may vary.</p>
<p>Exit current menu without saving the modification.</p>
<p>In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.</p>
<p>Click scroll wheel button</p>
<p>Switch the items in the check box.</p>
<p>Page up or page down.</p>
<p>Point to select and move</p>
<p>Select current control and move it.</p>
<p>Dragging selection with left button</p>
<p>a box</p>
<p>mouse</p>
<p>Select motion detection zone.</p>
<p>Select privacy mask zone.</p>
<p>Table 3-11</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="657" height="488" class="wp-image-2080" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 43" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 402" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43.jpeg 657w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-43-300x223.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 657px) 100vw, 657px" /></p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark55"></a> Connecting Basics</li>
</ol>
<p>This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.</p>
<p>Typical Connection Diagram</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall govern.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="512" class="wp-image-2081" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 44" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 403" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-300x173.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-768x444.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-44-810x468.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="592" class="wp-image-2082" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 45" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 404" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-300x200.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-768x513.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-45-810x541.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-2</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="886" height="656" class="wp-image-2083" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 46" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 405" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46.jpeg 886w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-300x222.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-768x569.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-46-810x600.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 886px) 100vw, 886px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-3</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark57"></a> Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark59"></a> Video Input</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The video input interface is BNC. The input video format includes: PAL/NTSC BNC (1.0VP-P, 75Q.).</p>
<p>The video signal should comply with your national standards.</p>
<p>The input video signal shall have high SNR, low distortion; low interference, natural color and suitable lightness.</p>
<p><strong>Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal</strong></p>
<p>The camera shall be installed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, inflammable, explosive substances and etc.</p>
<p>The camera and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the camera.</p>
<p><strong>Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line</strong></p>
<p>Please use high quality, sound shielded BNC. Please select suitable BNC model according to the transmission distance.</p>
<p>If the distance is too long, you should use twisted pair cable, and you can add video compensation devices or use optical fiber to ensure video quality.</p>
<p>You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference, especially the high-tension current.</p>
<p><strong>Keep connection lugs in well contact</strong></p>
<p>The signal line and shielded wire should be fixed firmly and in well connection. Avoid dry joint, lap welding and oxidation.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark61"></a> Video Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Video output includes a BNC (PAL/NTSC1.0Vp-p, 75Q) output, a VGA output and HDMI output. System supports BNC, VGA and HDMI output at the same time.</p>
<p>When you are using pc-type monitor to replace the monitor, please pay attention to the following points:</p>
<ul>
<li>To defer aging, do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time.</li>
<li>Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status.</li>
<li>Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices.</li>
</ul>
<p>Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method. You also need to reduce the working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices. The low- quality TV may result in device damage.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark63"></a> Audio Input</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>These series Product audio input port adopt BNC port.</p>
<p>Due to high impedance of audio input, please use active sound pick-up.</p>
<p>Audio transmission is like video transmission. Try to avoid interference, dry joint, loose contact and it shall be away from high tension current.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark65"></a> Audio Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200mv 1KQ (BNC or RCA). It can directly connect to low impedance earphone, active sound box or amplifier-drive audio output device. If the sound box and the pick-up cannot be separated spatially, it is easy to arouse squeaking. In this case you can adopt the following measures:</p>
<ul>
<li>Use better sound pick-up with better directing property.</li>
<li>Reduce the volume of the sound box.</li>
<li>Using more sound-absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve acoustics environment.</li>
<li>Adjust the layout to reduce happening of the squeaking.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark67"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark68"></a> Connecting to Alarm Input and Output</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please read the followings before connecting.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm input</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Please make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input.</li>
<li>Grounding signal is needed for alarm input.</li>
<li>Alarm input needs the low-level voltage signal.</li>
<li>Alarm input mode can be either NC (normal Open) or NO (Normal Close)</li>
<li>When you are connecting two DVR (WITHOUT HDD)s or you are connecting one DVR</li>
</ul>
<p>(WITHOUT HDD) and one other device, please use a relay to separate them.</p>
<p><strong>Alarm output</strong></p>
<p>The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly (It shall be less than 1A) to avoid high current which may result in relay damage. Please use the contactor to realize the connection between the alarm output port and the load.</p>
<p><strong>How to connect PTZ decoder</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR (WITHOUT HDD), otherwise you may not control the PTZ. Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to the grounding.</li>
<li>Avoid high voltage. Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures.</li>
<li>For too long signal wires, 120Q should be parallel connected between A, B lines on the far end to reduce reflection and guarantee the signal quality.</li>
<li>“485 A, B” of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) cannot parallel connect with “485 port” of another</li>
</ul>
<p>device.</p>
<ul>
<li>The voltage between of A, B lines of the decoder should be less than 5V.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark70"></a> Please make sure the front-end device has soundly earthed</p>
<p>Improper grounding may result in chip damage.</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark72"></a> .3.1 Introducing Alarm Port</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The alarm input ports are dependent on the model you purchased.</p>
<p>I 4 NOT C1 4 NO2 C2 4 NO3 C3 4 NO4 C4 4- NO5 C5 NC5 4- <sup>C</sup>&lt;2V~ T* T- R+ R- |</p>
<p>[BBHMBBBBBBiaiilIRffBBBBBïHïBBRI I 1 2 3 445 6 7 8 4 A B 4 9 10 11 12 4 13 14 15 16 4 4 |</p>
<p>Figure 4-4</p>
<p><strong>Icon Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,</p>
<p>7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16</td>
<td>ALARM 1 to ALARM 16. The alarm becomes active in low voltage.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3, NO4 C4</td>
<td>There are four groups of normal open activation output (on/off button).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NO5 C5 NC5,</td>
<td>There is one group of normal open activation output (on/off button).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>CTRL 12V</td>
<td>Control power output of the 6<strong><sup>th</sup> </strong>alarm output channel. Voltage current: 500mA.</p>
<ul>
<li>When there is an alarm output, close the power output.</li>
<li>When the alarm is cancelled, open the power output.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>+12V</td>
<td>Rated current.</p>
<p>Voltage current: 500mA.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Ground cable.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>485 A/B</td>
<td>485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as decoder. 1200 should be parallel connected between A, B lines if there are too many PTZ decoders.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>T+,T-,R+,R-</td>
<td>Four-wire full-duplex RS485 port.</p>
<p>T+ T-: output wire.</p>
<p>R+ R-: input wire.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 4-1</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark74"></a> .3.2 Alarm Input</li>
</ul>
<p>Please refer to the following figure for more information.</p>
<ul>
<li>Grounding alarm inputs which includes Normal open and Normal close type.</li>
<li>Please parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector (Provide external power to the alarm detector).</li>
<li>Please parallel connect the Ground of the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and the ground of the alarm detector.</li>
<li>Please connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) alarm input(ALARM)</li>
<li>Use the same ground with that of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) if you use external power to the alarm device.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="521" height="307" class="wp-image-2084" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 47" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 406" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47.jpeg 521w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-47-300x177.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 521px) 100vw, 521px" /></p>
<p>Figure 4-5</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark76"></a> .3.3 Alarm Output</li>
<li>Provide external power to external alarm device.</li>
<li>To avoid overloading, please read the following relay parameters table carefully.</li>
<li>RS485 A/B cable is for the A/B cable of the PTZ decoder.</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark78"></a> .3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Refer to the actual product for relay model information.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Model</strong></td>
<td><strong>HFD23/005-1ZS</strong></td>
<td><strong>HRB1-S-DC5V</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Material of the touch</td>
<td>AgNi+ gold-plating</td>
<td>AuAg10/AgNi10/CuNi30</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="4">Rating (Resistance Load)</td>
<td>Rated switch capacity</td>
<td>30V DC 1A/125V AC 0.5A</td>
<td>24V DC 1A/125V AC 2A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch power</td>
<td>62.5VA/30W</td>
<td>250VA/48W</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch voltage</td>
<td>125V AC/60V DC</td>
<td>125V AC/60V DC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Maximum switch currency</td>
<td>2A</td>
<td>2A</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Insulation</td>
<td>Between touches</td>
<td>400VAC 1 minute</td>
<td>500VAC 1 minute</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Between touch and winding</td>
<td>1000VAC 1 minute</td>
<td>1000VAC 1 minute</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Turn-on Time</td>
<td>5 ms max</td>
<td>5ms max</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Turn-off Time</td>
<td>5 ms max</td>
<td>5ms max</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Longevity</td>
<td>Mechanical</td>
<td>1x107times</td>
<td>5&#215;106 times</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Model</strong></td>
<td><strong>HFD23/005-1ZS</strong></td>
<td><strong>HRB1-S-DC5V</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>(300 times/MIN)</td>
<td>(300 times/MIN)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Electrical</td>
<td>1*105 times (30 times/MIN)</td>
<td>2.5*104 times (30 times/MIN)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Working Temperature</td>
<td>-30C-+70C</td>
<td>-40C-+70C</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark80"></a> Connecting to RS485 Port</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Connect the RS485 cable of the PTZ camera to the RS485 port on the Device. Ensure the match of A and B interfaces.</p>
<p>Step 2 Connect the video out cable of the PTZ camera to the video input port on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Turn on the PTZ camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark82"></a> Replacing Battery</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Please make sure to use the same battery model if possible.</p>
<p>We recommend replace battery regularly (such as one-year) to guarantee system time</p>
<p>accuracy.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2085" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-48.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 48" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 407"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Before replacement, please save the system setup, otherwise, you may lose the data completely!</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark84"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark85"></a> Local Configurations</li>
</ol>
<p>Please read the following notes prior to using your Device.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.</li>
<li>The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.</li>
<li>Conventions for mouse operations on a menu.</li>
</ul>
<p>O Click: On the menu, left-click the mouse once on an option to enter the option setting.</p>
<p>O Right-click: On any interface, right-click the mouse once to return to the previous level. For details about mouse operations, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark52">&#8220;3.4 Mouse Operations.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark87"></a> Initial Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark89"></a> Booting up</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure the input voltage corresponds to the power requirement of the Device. Power on the Device after the power cable is properly connected.</li>
<li>To protect the Device, please connect the Device with the power cable first, and then connect to the power source.</li>
<li>To ensure the stable work of the Device and the external devices connected to the Device and to prolong the batter life, it is recommended to refer to the national related standard to use the power source that provides stable voltage with less interference from ripples. USP power source is recommended.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Connect the Device to the monitor.</p>
<p>Step 2 Plug in the power cable to the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Press the power button to turn on the Device. The power indicator light is on.</p>
<p>On the connected monitor, the live view screen is displayed by default. If you turn on the Device during the time period that is configured for recording, the system starts recording after it is turned on, and you will see the icon indicating recording status is working in the specific channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark91"></a> Initializing the Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When booting up for the first time, you need to configure the password information for <strong>admin </strong>(by default).</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>To secure the Device, it is strongly recommended for you to properly keep the password for admin and modify it regularly.</p>
<p>Step 1 Turn on the Device.</p>
<p>The <strong>Device Initialization </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark93"> Figure 5-1.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="605" class="wp-image-2086" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 49" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 408" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49.jpeg 866w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-768x537.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-810x566.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-49-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark93"></a> Step 2 Configure the password information for admin. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark94"> Table 5-1.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User</td>
<td colspan="4">By default, the user is <strong>admin</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td colspan="4" rowspan="2">In the <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the password for admin.</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Confirm Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Prompt Question</td>
<td colspan="4">In the <strong>Prompt Question </strong>box, enter the information that can remind you of the password.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" rowspan="2">On the login interface, click</td>
<td>Efi</td>
<td rowspan="2">, the prompt will display to help you</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>—</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>find back the password.</td>
<td colspan="3"></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark94"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The unlock pattern setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark95"> Figure 5-2.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="565" class="wp-image-2087" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 50" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 409" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-768x527.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-810x556.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-50-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark95"></a> Step 4 Draw a unlock pattern.</p>
<p>After the setting is completed, the password protection settings interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark96"> Figure 5-3.</a></p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.</li>
<li>If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click <strong>Skip</strong>.</li>
<li>Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock</li>
</ul>
<p>pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for login.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="584" class="wp-image-2088" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 51" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 410" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-768x536.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-810x565.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-51-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark96"></a> Figure 5-3</p>
<p>Step 5 Configure the protection parameters for password. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark97"> Table 5-2.</a></p>
<p>After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the password through the reserved email address or security questions. For details about resetting the password, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark98">&#8220;5.1.3 Resetting Password.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security questions functions on the interface.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Password</strong></p>
<p><strong>Protection Mode</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Email Address</td>
<td colspan="3">Enter the reserved email address.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Email Address </strong>box, enter an email address for password reset. In case you forgot password, enter the security code that you will get from this reserved email address to reset the password of admin.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Security</p>
<p>Questions</td>
<td colspan="3">Configure the security questions and answers.</p>
<p>In case you forgot password, enter the answers to the questions can make you reset the password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Œ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">If you want to configure the email or security questions fucntion later or you want to</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark97"></a> change the configurations, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Account </strong>^ <strong>USER</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-2</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Save </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>End-User License Agreement </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step <em>S</em> Select the <strong>I have read and agree to all terms </strong>check box.</p>
<p>Step 8 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface is displayed. For details about quick settings during startup, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark108">&#8220;5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark98"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark99"></a> 5.1.3 Resetting Password</p>
<p>You can reset the password through the QR code or the security questions.</p>
<ul>
<li>To reset through the QR code, make sure the Enable check box is selected in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System </strong>^ <strong>SECURITY &gt; Password Reset</strong>.</li>
<li>To reset through the security questions, make sure the security quesitons is configured. Step 1 Enter the login interface.</li>
<li>If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark101"> Figure 5-4.</a> Click <strong>Forgot Pattern</strong>, the password login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark102"> Figure 5-5.</a></li>
<li>If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark102"> Figure 5-5.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>On the unlock pattern login interface, click <strong>Switch User </strong>to login<strong>; </strong>or on the password login interface, in the <strong>User Nam</strong>e list, select other users to login.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="331" height="534" class="wp-image-2089" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 52" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 411" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52.jpeg 331w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-52-186x300.jpeg 186w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 331px) 100vw, 331px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-4</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="490" height="274" class="wp-image-2090" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 53" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 412" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53.jpeg 490w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-53-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 490px) 100vw, 490px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-5</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark101"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark102"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>□.</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark103"> Figure 5-6.</a> Enter the email address, and then click <strong>Next</strong>, the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark104"> Figure 5-7.</a></li>
<li>If you have set the reserved email address, the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark104"> Figure 5-7.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="611" class="wp-image-2091" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 54" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 413" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-54-810x569.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark103"></a> Figure 5-6</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="856" height="600" class="wp-image-2092" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 55" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 414" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55.jpeg 856w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-768x538.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-55-810x568.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 856px) 100vw, 856px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-7</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark104"></a> Step 3 Rest the password.</p>
<ul>
<li>QR code</li>
</ul>
<p>Follow the onscreen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email address. In the <strong>Security code </strong>box, enter the security code.</p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You are given the limited times to get the security code by scanning the QR code within 24 hours. Please operate carefully.</li>
<li>Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.</li>
</ul>
<p>• Security questions</p>
<ol>
<li>On the <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface as shown in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark103"> Figure 5-6,</a> in the <strong>Reset Type </strong>list, select <strong>Security Questions</strong>, the Security Questions interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark105">Figure 5-8.</a></li>
</ol>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you did not configure the security questions before, in the <strong>Reset Type </strong>list, there will be no <strong>Security Questions</strong>.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Answer </strong>box, enter the correct answers.</li>
</ol>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="583" class="wp-image-2093" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 56" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 415" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-768x541.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-56-810x571.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-8</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark105"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The new password resetting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark106"> Figure 5-9.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="605" class="wp-image-2094" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 57" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 416" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-57-810x569.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark106"></a> Step 5</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Step 7</p>
<p>Figure 5-9</p>
<p>In the <strong>New Password </strong>box, enter the new password and enter it again in the <strong>Confirm Password </strong>box.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Save</strong>. The password resetting is started.</p>
<p>After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed.</p>
<p>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote devices, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark107"> Figure 5-10.</a></p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Cancel</strong>, the resetting is finished.</li>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>, the Sync Info interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark107"> Figure 5-10.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="577" class="wp-image-2095" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 58" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 417" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-768x542.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-58-810x572.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-10</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2096" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-59.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 59" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 418"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark107"></a> This message appears only when there are digital channels instead of complete analog channels.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="576" class="wp-image-2097" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 60" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 419" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-768x535.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-810x564.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-60-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-11</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark108"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark109"></a> 5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark111"></a> Entering Startup Wizard</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The Startup Wizard helps you configure the basic settings to set up the Device.</p>
<p>After you have initialized the Device, the <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark113"> Figure 5­12.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="571" height="384" class="wp-image-2098" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 61" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 420" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61.jpeg 571w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-61-300x202.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 571px) 100vw, 571px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-12</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark113"></a> CD NOTE</p>
<p>If you select the <strong>Auto-check for updates </strong>check box, the system will notify you automatically when updates are available.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark114"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark115"></a> Configuring General Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the general settings for the Device such as Device name, language, and settings for instant playback.</p>
<p>You can also configure general settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> System <em>■+</em> General ^ General</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Startup Wizard </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>General </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark117"> Figure 5-13.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="878" height="614" class="wp-image-2099" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 62" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 421" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62.jpeg 878w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-768x537.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-810x566.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-62-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 878px) 100vw, 878px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-13</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the general settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark118"> Table 5-3.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark117"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device Name </strong>box, enter the Device name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device No.</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device No. </strong>box, enter a number for the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Language</td>
<td>In the <strong>Language </strong>list, select a language for the Device system.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Standard</td>
<td>In the <strong>Video Standard </strong>list, select <strong>PAL </strong>or <strong>NTSC </strong>according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Instant Play (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Instant Play </strong>box, enter the time length for playing back the recoded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60.</p>
<p>On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play back the recorded video within the configured time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Logout (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Auto Logout </strong>box, enter the standby time for the Device. The Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the configured time period. You need to login the Device again.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time for the Device.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Monitor Channel(s) when logout</strong>. You can select the channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Navigation Bar</td>
<td>Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen, the navigation bar is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark118"></a> Mouse Sensitivity</td>
<td>Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider.</p>
<p>The bigger the value is, the faster the double-clicking speed must be.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-3</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark119"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark120"></a> Configuring Date and Time Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the system time, choose the time zone, set the daylight saving time, and enable the NTP server.</p>
<p>You can also configure date and time settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ System <em>■+</em> General ^ Date &amp;Time</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the general settings, on the <strong>General </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Date &amp; Time </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark122"> Figure 5-14.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="831" height="582" class="wp-image-2100" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 63" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 422" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63.jpeg 831w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-768x538.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-63-810x567.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 831px) 100vw, 831px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-14</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark123"> Table 5-4.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark122"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>System Time</td>
<td>In the <strong>System Time </strong>box, enter time for the system.</p>
<p>Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the system, and the time in adjust automatically.</p>
<p>/K CAUTION</p>
<p>Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid the recoding period or stop recording first before you change the system time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Date Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>Date Format </strong>list, select a date format for the system.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Date Separator</td>
<td>In the <strong>Date Separator </strong>list, select a separator style for the date.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>Time Format </strong>list, select <strong>12-HOUR </strong>or <strong>24-HOUR </strong>for the time display style.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DST</td>
<td>Enable the Daylight-Saving Time function. Click <strong>Week </strong>or click <strong>Date</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</td>
<td rowspan="2">Configure the start time and end time for the DST.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>End Time</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NTP</td>
<td>Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Server</td>
<td>In the <strong>Server </strong>box, enter the IP address or domain name of the corresponding NTP server.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Manual Update</strong>, the Device starts syncing with the server immediately.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting is 123.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark123"></a> Interval (Min.)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Interval </strong>box, enter the amount of time that you want the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from 0 to 65535.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-4</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark124"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark125"></a> Configuring Network Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the basic network settings such as net mode, IP version, and IP address of the Device.</p>
<p>You can also configure network settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the date and time settings, on the <strong>Date&amp;Time </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark127"> Figure 5-15.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="795" height="562" class="wp-image-2101" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 64" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 423" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64.jpeg 795w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-64-768x543.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 795px) 100vw, 795px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-15</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for network parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark128"> 0.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark127"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark128"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Net Mode</td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Multi-address</strong>: Two Ethernet ports work separately through either of which you can request the Device to provide the services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email and FTP. If one of the</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>two Ethernet ports is disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system network status is regarded as offline.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Fault Tolerance</strong>: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address.</li>
</ul>
<p>Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the network connection.</p>
<p>When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Load Balance</strong>: Two network cards share one IP address and they</li>
</ul>
<p>are working at the same time to share the network load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working normally. When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Default Ethernet Port</td>
<td>In the <strong>Ethernet Card </strong>list, select an Ethernet port as a default port.</p>
<p>This setting is available only when the <strong>Multi-address </strong>is selected in the <strong>Net Mode </strong>list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Version</td>
<td>In the <strong>IP Version </strong>list, you can select <strong>IPv4 </strong>or <strong>IPv6</strong>. Both versions are supported for access.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>MAC Address</td>
<td>Displays the MAC address of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DHCP</td>
<td>Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled.</p>
<ul>
<li>If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the <strong>IP</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Address </strong>box, <strong>Subnet Mask </strong>box and <strong>Default Gateway </strong>box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you want manually to configure the IP information, disable the</li>
</ul>
<p>DHCP function first.</p>
<ul>
<li>If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask,</li>
</ul>
<p>default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td rowspan="3">Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and default gateway.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>IP address and default gateway must be in the same network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Subnet Mask</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Default Gateway</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DNS DHCP</td>
<td>Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preferred DNS</td>
<td>In the <strong>Preferred DNS </strong>box, enter the IP address of DNS.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alternate DNS</td>
<td>In the <strong>Alternate DNS </strong>box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>MTU</td>
<td>In the <strong>MTU </strong>box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Modifying MTU value will cause network interruption and restart,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>which interrupt the network service. There is a pop-up message to</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>let you confirm if you want to save the modification, if yes, the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>modification takes effect.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Suggested MTU values are as below.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>connection, and it is also the default value of some routers,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>network adapters and switches.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>O 1468: Optimized value for DHCP.</p>
<p>O 1450: Optimized value for VPN.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Test</td>
<td>Click <strong>Test </strong>to test if the entered IP address and gateway are interworking.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-5</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark129"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark130"></a> Configuring InstaOn Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add the Device into your cell phone client or the platform to manage.</p>
<p>You can also configure InstaOn function by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Network <em>■+</em> InstaOn Cloud</strong>.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Make sure the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is connected into the Internet, and if yes, in the <strong>Status </strong>box of the InstaOn interface, it shows <strong>Online</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the network settings, on the <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>InstaOn Cloud </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark132"> Figure 5-16.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="747" height="524" class="wp-image-2102" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 65" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 424" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65.jpeg 747w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-65-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 747px) 100vw, 747px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-16</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark132"></a> Step 2 Enable the InstaOn function.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>You can start adding the device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.</li>
<li>Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual.</li>
</ul>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>You can also enter the QR code of Cell Phone Client and Device SN by clicking<br />
on the top right of the interfaces after you have entered the Main Menu.</p>
<p>PG</p>
<p>To use this function, take adding device into Cell Phone Client as an example.</p>
<p><strong>Adding Device into Cell Phone Client</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Use your cell phone to scan the QR code under Cell Phone Client to download the application.</p>
<p>Step 2 On your cell phone, open the application, and then tap .</p>
<p>The menu is displayed. You can start adding the device.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>Device Manager</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Device Manager </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark133"> Figure 5-17.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="428" height="731" class="wp-image-2103" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 66" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 425" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66.jpeg 428w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-66-176x300.jpeg 176w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 428px) 100vw, 428px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-17</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark133"></a> Tap on the top right corner.</li>
</ol>
<p>The interface requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>O If the Device has not been initialized, Tap <strong>Device Initialization </strong>to perform initializing by following the onscreen instructions.</p>
<p>O If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.</p>
<ol>
<li>Tap <strong>Add Device</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Add Device interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark134"> Figure 5-18.</a></p>
<p>LJ NOTE</p>
<p>You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual takes adding wired device as an example.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="408" height="640" class="wp-image-2104" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 67" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 426" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67.jpeg 408w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-67-191x300.jpeg 191w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 408px) 100vw, 408px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-18</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark134"></a> 5) Tap <strong>InstaOn</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>InstaOn </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark135"> Figure 5-19.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="370" height="534" class="wp-image-2105" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 68" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 427" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68.jpeg 370w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-68-208x300.jpeg 208w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 370px) 100vw, 370px" /></p>
<p><strong>..■Il E 10:39 O 41%</strong></p>
<p>(V) Scan QR Code</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="428" height="458" class="wp-image-2106" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 69" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 428" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69.jpeg 428w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-69-280x300.jpeg 280w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 428px) 100vw, 428px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-19</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark135"></a> Enter a name for the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), the username and password, scan the QR code under <strong>Device SN</strong>.</li>
<li>Tap <strong>Start Live Preview</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The Device is added and displayed on the live view interface of the cell phone.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark136"> Figure 5-20.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="389" height="664" class="wp-image-2107" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 70" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 429" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70.jpeg 389w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-70-176x300.jpeg 176w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 389px) 100vw, 389px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-20</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark136"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark137"></a> Configuring Encode Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings of main stream and sub stream for the Device.</p>
<p>You can also configure encode settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera <em>■+</em> Encode ^ Encode</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the InstaOn settings, on the <strong>InstaOn </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>. The <strong>Encode </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark139"> Figure 5-21.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="854" height="599" class="wp-image-2108" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 71" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 430" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71.jpeg 854w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-768x539.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-71-810x568.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 854px) 100vw, 854px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-21</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark139"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark140"> Table 5-6.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Smart Codec</td>
<td>Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Main Stream: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(Motion</li>
</ul>
<p>Detect), or <strong>Alarm</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the encode mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.265: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high</li>
</ul>
<p>definition. This setting is recommended.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.264: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher</li>
</ul>
<p>bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.</p>
<p>The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution.</p>
<p>Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>However, the actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate Type </strong>list, select <strong>CBR </strong>(Constant Bit Rate) or <strong>VBR </strong>(Variable Bit Rate). If you select <strong>CBR</strong>, the image quality cannot be configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Quality</td>
<td>This function is available if you select <strong>VBR </strong>in the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>List. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I Frame Interval</td>
<td>The interval between two reference frames.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video</td>
<td>Enable the function for sub stream.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Encode</td>
<td rowspan="3">Click <strong>More Setting</strong>, the <strong>More Setting </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main</li>
</ul>
<p>stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Source: In the <strong>Audio Source </strong>list, you can select <strong>LOCAL</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>and <strong>HDCVI</strong>.</p>
<p>O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio In port.</p>
<p>O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Format: In the <strong>Audio Forma</strong>t list, select a format that you</li>
</ul>
<p>need.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Source</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Format</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-6</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark140"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark141"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the basic snapshot settings such as quantity of snapshot each time, channel(s) to take snapshot, and image size and quality of snapshot.</p>
<p>You can also configure general settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>For more information about snapshot settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark365">&#8220;5.8 Configuring Snapshot Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the <strong>Encode </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark143"> Figure 5-22.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="778" height="545" class="wp-image-2109" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 72" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 431" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72.jpeg 778w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-72-768x538.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 778px) 100vw, 778px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-22</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark143"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark144"> Table 5-7.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select type of snapshots.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Size</td>
<td>In the <strong>Image Size </strong>list, select a value for the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Quality</td>
<td>Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark144"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Configure or customize the snapshot frequency.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-7</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark145"></a> Configuring Basic Storage Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings for the situations when HDD is full, file length and time length of recorded video, and the settings if to auto-delete the old files.</p>
<p>You can also configure basic storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ BASIC</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BASIC </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark147"> Figure 5-23.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="711" height="501" class="wp-image-2110" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 73" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 432" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73.jpeg 711w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-73-300x211.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 711px) 100vw, 711px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-23</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark147"></a> Step 2 Configure the basic storage settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark148"> Table 5-8.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD Full</td>
<td>Configure the settings for the situation when all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Stop Record </strong>to stop recording</li>
<li>Select <strong>Overwrite </strong>to overwrite the recorded video files always</li>
</ul>
<p>from the earliest time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pack Mode</td>
<td>Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto-Delete Old Files</td>
<td>Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, in the <strong>Auto­Delete Old Files </strong>list, select <strong>Customized </strong>to configure the time length for how long you want to keep the old files.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-8</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark148"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark149"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark150"></a> Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the schedule for the recorded video such as channels to record, alarm settings, and the armed period.</p>
<p>You can also configure recorded video storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+ </em>Schedule ^ Record</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the basic storage settings, on the <strong>BASIC </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Record </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark152"> Figure 5-24.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="713" height="500" class="wp-image-2111" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 74" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 433" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74.jpeg 713w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-74-300x210.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 713px) 100vw, 713px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-24</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark152"></a> Step 2 Configure the record settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark153"> Table 5-9.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to record the video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pre-record</td>
<td>In the <strong>Pre-record </strong>list, enter the amount of time that you want to start the recording in advance.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Redundancy</td>
<td>If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you can find the backup in the other HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Storage </strong>^ <strong>HDD MANAGER</strong>, and then set</li>
</ul>
<p>a HDD as redundant HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Storage </strong>^ <strong>Schedule </strong>^ <strong>Record</strong>, and</li>
</ul>
<p>then select the <strong>Redundancy </strong>check box.</p>
<p>O If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy</p>
<p>function takes effect next time you record no matter you select the check box or not.</p>
<p>O If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded</p>
<p>files will be packed, and then start recording according to the new schedule.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Not all models support this function.</li>
<li>The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but not</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshots.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event type</td>
<td>Select the check box of the event type which includes <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(motion detect, video loss, tempering, diagnosis), <strong>Alarm </strong>(IoT alarms, local alarms, alarms from alarm box, IPC external alarms, IPC Offline alarms), <strong>MD &amp; Alarm</strong>, <strong>Intel </strong>(IVS events, face detection), and <strong>POS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the configured recording setting is active.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EO NOTE</p>
<p>The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark153"></a> Copy</td>
<td>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-9</p>
<p>Step 3 Define the video recording period by drawing or editing. By default, it is active all the time.</p>
<p>• Define the period by drawing.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the check box of event type. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark154"> Figure 5-25.</a></li>
</ol>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark154"></a> B General</p>
<p><strong>■ MD</strong></p>
<p>| Alarm</p>
<p>MD&amp;Alarm ■ Intel</p>
<p>■ 90S</p>
<p>Figure 5-25</p>
<ol>
<li>Define a period. The system supports maximum six periods.</li>
</ol>
<p>o</p>
<p>Define for the whole week: Click H next to <strong>All</strong>, all the icon switches to □</p>
<p>o</p>
<p>you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.</p>
<p>Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day one by one, the</p>
<p>icon switches to S. You can define the period for the selected days</p>
<p>simultaneously.</p>
<p>On the timeline, drag to define a period. The Device starts recoding the selected<br />
event type in the defined period. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark155"> Figure 5-26.</a></p>
<p>3)</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="850" height="404" class="wp-image-2112" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 75" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 434" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75.jpeg 850w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-300x143.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-768x365.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-75-810x385.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 850px) 100vw, 850px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-26</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark155"></a> The color bar indicates the event type that is effective in a defined period:</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Recording priority in case of event types are overlapped: <strong>MD&amp;Alarm </strong><em>•+ </em><strong>Alarm ^ Intel ^ MD ^ General</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Select the check box of event type, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="42" height="41" class="wp-image-2113" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-76.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 76" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 435"></p>
<p>to clear the defined</p>
<p>period.</p>
<ul>
<li>When selecting MD&amp;Alarm, the respective check box of MD and Alarm will be cleared.</li>
</ul>
<p>• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</p>
<p>1)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2114" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-77.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 77" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 436"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark156"> Figure 5-27.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="853" height="479" class="wp-image-2115" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 78" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 437" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78.jpeg 853w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-78-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 853px) 100vw, 853px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-27</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark156"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the event check box.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
<li>After configuring the recording schedule settings, you need to perform the following operations to start recording according to the defined schedule. O Enable the alarm event and cofigure the settings for the recording channel.</li>
</ul>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark447">&#8220;5.10 Alarm Events Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>O You need to enable the recording function, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">Control.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark157"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark158"></a> 5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule</p>
<p>You can configure the storage schedule for the snapshot such as channels to take snapshot, alarm settings, and the armed period.</p>
<p>You can also configure snapshot storage settings by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage <em>■+</em></strong></p>
<p><strong>Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 After you have configured the video recording settings, on the <strong>Record </strong>interface, click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNAPSHOT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark160"> Figure 5-28.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="9">Snapshot</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel 1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Alt</td>
<td colspan="2">Q General</td>
<td>■ MD</td>
<td>■ Alarm</td>
<td colspan="2">MD&amp;Alarm</td>
<td>■ Intel</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>0</td>
<td>2 4</td>
<td>6 8</td>
<td>10 12 14</td>
<td>16 18</td>
<td>20</td>
<td>22 24</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Sunday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ Monday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Tuesday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>«</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>□ Wednes&#8230;</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Thursday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>o</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Friday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>o Saturday</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Default</p>
<p>Copy</p>
<p>Back Finished Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-28</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark160"></a> Step 2 Configure the snapshot settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark161"> Table 5-10.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to take a snapshot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event type</td>
<td>Select the check box of the event type which includes <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD</strong>, <strong>Alarm</strong>, <strong>MD&amp;Alarm</strong>, <strong>Intel</strong>, and <strong>POS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the configured snapshot setting is active. For details about defining a period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Recorded Video Storage Schedule.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark161"></a> Copy</td>
<td>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-10</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Finished</strong>.</p>
<p>A pop-up message is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The live view screen is displayed. The setting up with startup wizard is completed. You can start using the Device.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark162"></a> 5.2 Live View</p>
<p>After you logged in the Device, the live view is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark164"> Figure 5-29.</a> The number of channels displayed depends on your model.</p>
<p>To enter the live view screen from other interfaces, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="53" height="46" class="wp-image-2116" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-79.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 79" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 438"></p>
<p>on the top right of the screen.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="664" class="wp-image-2117" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 80" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 439" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-300x241.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-768x617.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-80-810x650.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-29</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark164"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark165"></a> Live View Screen</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the live video from the connected cameras through each channel on the screen.</p>
<ul>
<li>By default, the system time, channel name and channel number are displayed on each channel window. This setting can be configured by selecting <strong>Main Menu &gt; Camera &gt; OVERLAY.</strong></li>
<li>The figure in the bottom right corner represents channel number. If the channel position is changed or the channel name is modified, you can recognize the channel number by this figure and then perform the operations such as record query and playback.</li>
</ul>
<p>For the icons displayed on each channel, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark167"> Table 5-11.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■1</td>
<td>Indicates recording status. This icon displays when the video is being recorded.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This icon displays when the motion detection occurs in the scene.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>?</td>
<td>This icon displays when the video loss is detected.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark167"></a> a</td>
<td>This icon displays when the channel monitoring is locked.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-11</p>
<p>TIPS</p>
<p>To switch the position of two channels, point to one of the two channels, and then drag the window to the other channel.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark168"></a> Live View Control bar</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The live view control bar provides you access to perform the operations such as playback, zoom, real-time backup, manual snapshot, voice talk, adding remote devices, and streams switch.</p>
<p>When you move the pointer to the top middle position of a channel window, the live view control bar is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark170"> Figure 5-30 </a>for analog channel and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark171"> Figure 5-31 </a>for digital channel.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>If there is not operation for six seconds after the control bar is displayed, the control bar hides automatically.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="474" height="429" class="wp-image-2118" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 81" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 440" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81.jpeg 474w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-81-300x272.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 474px) 100vw, 474px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark170"></a> Figure 5-30</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="473" height="439" class="wp-image-2119" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 82" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 441" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82.jpeg 473w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-82-300x278.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 473px) 100vw, 473px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark171"></a> Figure 5-31</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td>Instant Play</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>7</td>
<td>Add IP Camera</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Digital Zoom</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>Mute</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Real-time</p>
<p>Backup</td>
<td>6</td>
<td>Audio Talk</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark172"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark173"></a> 5.2.2.1 Instant Playback</p>
<p>You can play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video.</p>
<p>By clicking □, the instant playback interface is displayed. The instant playback has the</p>
<p>following features:</p>
<ul>
<li>Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.</li>
<li>Play, pause and close playback.</li>
<li>The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant playback and will not display until exited.</li>
<li>During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.</li>
<li>To change the playback time, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System &gt; GENERAL</strong>, in the <strong>Instant Play </strong>box, enter the time you want to play back. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark175"> Figure 5-32.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="794" height="447" class="wp-image-2120" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 83" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 442" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83.jpeg 794w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-83-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 794px) 100vw, 794px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-32</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark175"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark176"></a> 5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom</p>
<p>You can enlarge a specific area of the image to view the details by either of the following two ways.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click Ltl, the icon switches to ^3. Hold down the left mouse button to select the area</li>
</ul>
<p>you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.</p>
<ul>
<li>Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the selected area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.</li>
<li>When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the other enlarged areas.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Right-click on the enlarged image to return the original status.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark178"></a> Real-time Backup</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.</p>
<p>By clicking , the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is</p>
<p>automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark180"></a> Manual Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.</p>
<p>By clicking you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the</p>
<p>connected USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>To change the quantity of snapshots, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Camera </strong>^ <strong>Encode </strong>^ <strong>Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select the snapshot quantity.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark182"></a> Mute (Analog channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can mute the video sound by clicking</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2121" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-84.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 84" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 443"></p>
<p>. This function is supported in single-channel</p>
<p>view.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark184"></a> Bidirectional Talk (Digital channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve<br />
efficiency of emergency. This function is supported only when the remotely connected IPC<br />
device supports bidirectional talk.</p>
<p>, the icon switches to ^3, the bidirectional talk of the remote device is turned</p>
<p>on. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is disabled.</p>
<p>• Click □ to cancel the bidirectional talk. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is resumed.</p>
<p>• Click</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark186"></a> Remote Devices (Digital channel only)</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the information of remote devices and add new remote devices to replace the current connected devices.</p>
<p>By clicking LJ, the <strong>Camera Registration </strong>interface is displayed. For details about adding the</p>
<p>remote devices, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">&#8220;5.6 Configuring Remote Devices.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark188"></a> 5.2.3 Navigation Bar</p>
<p>You can access the functions to perform operations through the function icons on the navigation bar. For example, you can access Main Menu and switch window split mode. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark190"> Figure 5-33.</a> CD NOTE</p>
<p>The navigation bar is disabled by default. It does not appear in the live view screen until it is enabled. To enable it, select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>System </strong>^ <strong>General</strong>, enable the Navigation Bar, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="40" class="wp-image-2122" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 85" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 444" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-300x15.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-768x37.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-85-810x39.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-33</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark190"></a><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">□</td>
<td>Open <strong>Main Menu</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">0</td>
<td>Expand or condense the navigation bar.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">i_uuia»</td>
<td>Select view layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Go to the previous screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">IE]</td>
<td>Go to the next screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Enable tour function. The icon switches to ^^3.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">□</td>
<td>Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark228">&#8220;5.4 Controlling</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark228">PTZ Cameras.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Open the <strong>Color Setting </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark195">&#8220;5.2.5 Color</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark195">Setting.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>CD <strong>NOTE</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>This function is supported only in single-channel layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the record search interface. For detail, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark386">&#8220;5.9 Playing</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark386">Back Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">H</td>
<td>Open the <strong>EVENT </strong>interface to view the device alarm status. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark852">&#8220;5.19.3 Viewing Event Information.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">E3</td>
<td>Open the <strong>CHANNEL INFO </strong>interface to display the information of each channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the <strong>CAMERA REGISTRATION </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark311">&#8220;5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"></td>
<td>Open the <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark619">&#8220;5.14.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark619">Configuring Network Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">o</td>
<td>Open the <strong>HDD MANAGER </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark749">&#8220;5.17.3</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark749">Configuring HDD Manager.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Open the <strong>USB MANAGER </strong>interface. For details about USB operations, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark611">&#8220;5.13.2 Backing up Files&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">&#8220;5.19.2 Viewing Log</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">Information&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">&#8220;5.18.5 Exporting and Importing System Settings&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark831">&#8220;5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-12</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark191"></a> 5.2.4 Shortcut Menu</p>
<p>You can quickly access some function interfaces such as main menu, record search, PTZ setting, color setting and select the view split mode.</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark193"> Figure 5-34.</a> For details about the functions of shortcut menu, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark194"> Table 5-13.</a></p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>After you access any interface through shortcut menu, you can return to the previous screen by right-clicking on the current screen.</p>
<p><strong>Main Menu</strong></p>
<p><strong>Q Search</strong></p>
<p><strong>W PTZ</strong></p>
<p>■ View 1 ►</p>
<p>S View 4 »</p>
<p>■- View 8 ►</p>
<p>S View 9 ►</p>
<p>Si View 16 : Previous Screen : Next Screen</p>
<p>S Manual ►</p>
<p>Preview Mode »</p>
<p><strong>S Color Setting</strong></p>
<p><strong>3G</strong></p>
<p><strong>a Image</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-34</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark193"></a><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Main Menu</td>
<td>Open <strong>Main Menu </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Search</td>
<td>Open the <strong>Playback </strong>interface where you can search and play back record files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Open the <strong>PTZ </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>View Layout</td>
<td>Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or multi­channel layout.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Previous Screen</td>
<td rowspan="2">Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example, if you are using 4-split mode, the first screen is displaying the channel 1-4, click <strong>Next screen</strong>, you can view channel 5-8.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Next Screen</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Camera Registration</td>
<td>Open the <strong>CAMERA REGISTRATION </strong>interface. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">&#8220;5.6 Configuring Remote Devices</a></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark308">Adding Remote Devices.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Record</strong>, you can configure the recording mode as</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Auto </strong>or <strong>Manual</strong>, or stop the recording. You can also enable or disable snapshot function</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Alarm Out</strong>, you can configure alarm output settings.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Mode</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>General</strong>, the layout of live view screen is as default.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Show Face Lis</strong>t, the detected face snapshots are</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed in the bottom of the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Focus</td>
<td>Point to the channel window and right-click on it to open the shortcut menu, and then click <strong>Auto Focus</strong>.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all cameras support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Setting</td>
<td>Open the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface where you can adjust the video image color.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark194"></a> Image</td>
<td>Click to modify the camera properties.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-13</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark195"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark196"></a> Color Setting</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can adjust the video image color effect such as sharpness, brightness, and contrast. The parameters are different according to the connected camera type. Take analog channel as an example.</p>
<p>In the live view screen, right-click on the analog channel to see the shortcut menu, and then select <strong>Color Setting</strong>, the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark198"> Figure 5-35.</a></p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark279">&#8220;5.5.1 Configuring Image Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="529" height="585" class="wp-image-2123" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 86" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 445" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86.jpeg 529w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-86-271x300.jpeg 271w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 529px) 100vw, 529px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark198"></a> Figure 5-35</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Divide 24 hours into two periods and configure the corresponding color settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Effective Time</td>
<td>Enable the function and then set the effective time for each period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sharpness</td>
<td>Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hue</td>
<td>Adjust the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td>Adjust the image brightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</p>
<p>The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big.</p>
<p>The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Contrast</td>
<td>Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Saturation</td>
<td>Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Standard</strong>, <strong>Soft</strong>, <strong>Bright</strong>, <strong>Colorful</strong>, <strong>Bank</strong>, <strong>Customized 1</strong>, <strong>Customized 2</strong>, <strong>Customized 3, </strong>and <strong>Customized 4</strong>.</p>
<p>The sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation will adjust automatically according to the selected color mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>EQ</td>
<td>Enhance the image effect. Adjust the effect value.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> Click ^3, image is adjusted to the optimized effect</p>
<p>automatically.</p>
<p>• Click ^3, the current effect setting will be locked.</p>
<p>EO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Only HD analog channel supports this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Position</td>
<td>Adjust the display position of the image in the channel window.</p>
<p>The value indicates pixel. The default value is 16.</p>
<p>CO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>This function is only supported by analog channel.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Customized</td>
<td>You can customize four color modes.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Customized</strong>. The <strong>Customized Color </strong>interface is</li>
</ol>
<p>displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Customized 1</strong>, for example.</li>
</ol>
<p>Then configure the settings for sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation. If you select <strong>All</strong>, the configuration will apply to all four customized color modes.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
<li>On the <strong>COLOR </strong>interface, in the <strong>Color Mode </strong>list, you can</li>
</ol>
<p>select the customized color mode.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-14</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark199"></a> Live View Display</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="979" height="492" class="wp-image-2124" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 87" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 446" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87.jpeg 979w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-300x151.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-768x386.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-87-810x407.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 979px) 100vw, 979px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark201"></a> Configuring Display Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image transparency, and selecting the resolution.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong><em>■+</em><strong> Display</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DISPLAY </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark203"> Figure 5-36.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="784" height="439" class="wp-image-2125" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 88" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 447" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88.jpeg 784w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-88-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 784px) 100vw, 784px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-36</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark203"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark204"> Table 5-15.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="7">Main</p>
<p>Screen</td>
<td>Out Port</td>
<td>Indicates the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Time Title </strong>check box, the current system time displays in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Channel Title </strong>check box, the channel name, channel number and recording status display in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Original Rate</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Original Rate </strong>check box, the video image displays in its actual size in the channel window.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IVS Rule Preview</td>
<td>Select the <strong>IVS Rule Preview </strong>check box to enable IVS rule preview function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transparency</td>
<td>Configure the transparency of the graphical user interface (GUI). The higher the value, the more transparent the GUI becomes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280&#215;1024.</p>
<p>OJ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td></td>
<td>HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Mode</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>General: No information is displayed on the channel</li>
</ul>
<p>window.</p>
<ul>
<li>Show Face List: Displays the detected face snapshots</li>
</ul>
<p>taken as a result of face detection on the bottom of the live view screen.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable extra screen function. After this function is enabled, you can select which port as extra screen port, and the other port automatically becomes the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Extra</p>
<p>Screen</td>
<td>Out Port</td>
<td>Select the VGA port or HDMI port as the port connected by a secondary monitor. For example, if you select HDMI port as the extra screen port, the VGA port automatically becomes the main screen port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280&#215;720.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>HDMI port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>• The main menu does not display on the extra screen.</p>
<p>• If you do not enable the extra screen function, both the VGA port and HDMI port</p>
<p>display the same image.</p>
<p>Table 5-15</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark204"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark205"></a> Configuring Viewing Layout</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the view layout in the live view screen.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ VIEW</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>View Setting </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark207"> Figure 5-37.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="722" height="408" class="wp-image-2126" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 89" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 448" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89.jpeg 722w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-89-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 722px) 100vw, 722px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-37</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark207"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark208"></a> Step 2 Configure the view layout by clicking the layout buttons on the bottom. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark208"> Figure 5­38.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="228" height="56" class="wp-image-2127" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-90.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 90" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 449"></p>
<p>Figure 5-38</p>
<p>For example, click and select <strong>9-16</strong>, the view layout changes immediately,</p>
<p>see</p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark209">Figure 5-39.</a></p>
<p>Ji</p>
<p>DISPLAY</p>
<p>DISPLAY</p>
<p>VIEW</p>
<p>TOUR</p>
<p>ZERO-CHANNEL</p>
<p>• A S (!)</p>
<p>Display / DISPLAY / VIEW</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="631" height="367" class="wp-image-2128" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 91" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 450" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91.jpeg 631w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-91-300x174.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 631px) 100vw, 631px" /></p>
<p>Apply Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-39</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark209"></a> Step 3 Adjust the position of channels if needed.</p>
<p>In the channel list, for example, in the channel 9 list, you can select 10, and then the channel 9 and channel 10 exchange positions.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The live view screen displays the same layout as configured in this section.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark210"></a> Configuring Zero-Channel Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view several video sources on one channel on the web end.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Display <em>■&gt;</em> Zero-Channel</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ZERO-CHANNEL </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark212"> Figure 5-40.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="469" class="wp-image-2129" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 92" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 451" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-92-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark212"></a> Figure 5-40</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the zero-channel parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark213"> Table 5-16.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable zero-channel function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the video compression standard according to the device capability. The default is H.264.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the <strong>Resolution </strong>list, select the video resolution. The default is 704&#215;576 (D1).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Select a value between 1 and 25 for PAL standard, and between 1 and 30 for NTSC standard. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark213"></a> Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>The default value is 1024Kb/S. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability and frame rate.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-16</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>In the live interface on the web, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="355" height="31" class="wp-image-2130" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 93" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 452" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93.jpeg 355w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-93-300x26.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 355px) 100vw, 355px" /></p>
<p>to select one of the</p>
<p>multi-channel modes, and then you can view the local video image.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark214"></a> Configuring TV</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>You can adjust the border margins in top, bottom, left and right directions as well as the brightness of the monitor connected to the Video out port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tv Adjust</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>TV ADJUST </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark216"> Figure 5-41.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>DISPLAY</td>
<td>Tûp Mai yin</td>
<td><strong>-Ö</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>VIEW</td>
<td>Rcltcwn Margin</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ Û</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>KHJR</td>
<td>Leit Mai jo</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>ZERO-CHANHEL</td>
<td>FùgFl Mai pn</td>
<td>-o</td>
<td></td>
<td>+ 0</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>TV ADJUST</td>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td></td>
<td>o</td>
<td>+ 12«</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark216"></a><strong>OeiMlt OK Bad.</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-41</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the parameters according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark217"></a> Configuring Tour Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system is playing one channel group for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>TOUR </strong>interface is displayed. There are MainScreen tab and ExtraScreen tab, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark219"> Figure 5-42 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark220"> Figure 5-43.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="734" height="18" class="wp-image-2131" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 94" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 453" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94.jpeg 734w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-94-300x7.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 734px) 100vw, 734px" /></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Display &gt;</strong></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; DISPLAY /</strong></td>
<td><strong>&#8216; TOUR</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>DISPLAY</strong></td>
<td><strong>Main Screen</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>VIEW</strong></td>
<td><strong>Enable</strong></td>
<td><strong>!■</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Interval(Sec)</strong></td>
<td><strong>5</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>TOUR</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Video Detect</strong></td>
<td><strong>View 1</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>ZERO-CHANNEL</strong></td>
<td><strong>Alarm</strong></td>
<td><strong>Viewl</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Window Split</strong></td>
<td><strong>Viewl</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="570" height="181" class="wp-image-2132" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 95" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 454" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95.jpeg 570w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-95-300x95.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 570px) 100vw, 570px" /></p>
<p><strong>Add Modify Delete Move up Move down</strong></p>
<p><strong>Default</strong></p>
<p><strong>Apply Back</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-42</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark219"></a><strong>V </strong>DISPLAY</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>CtSFLAV</td>
<td><strong>Mùiî</strong> Szceri</td>
<td>EKii’j <strong>Soma</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>YEW</td>
<td>En-sWe</td>
<td>■_</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1C4JR</td>
<td><strong>Itïï-vAÎSm.</strong> j</td>
<td>5</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">ffiAOrCMWfflÊL</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Lfrrta Efdii</td>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
<td rowspan="2"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">77Âri.ii.F$,T</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IB J</td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>C-A-nd i&#8221;r&gt;xi2</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="464" height="23" class="wp-image-2133" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 96" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 455" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96.jpeg 464w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-96-300x15.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 464px) 100vw, 464px" /></p>
<p>a j a</p>
<p>3 2</p>
<p>4 ■/ 4</p>
<ol>
<li>i</li>
<li>/ ?</li>
</ol>
<p>u <em>j</em> a</p>
<p>B J S</p>
<p>TO J TO</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark220"></a> Md Krikty lifte to Mow up «uwiiwffl</p>
<p>Figure 5-43</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the tour parameters for both Main Screen and Extra Screen.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark221"> Table 5-17.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable tour function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Detect, Alarm</td>
<td>Select the View 1 or View 8 for <strong>Motion Detect </strong>tour and <strong>Alarm </strong>Tour (system alarm events).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Window Split</td>
<td>In the <strong>Window Split </strong>list, select <strong>View 1</strong>, <strong>View 4</strong>, <strong>View 8</strong>, or other modes that are supported by the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel Group</td>
<td>Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting.</p>
<ul>
<li>Add a channel group: Click <strong>Add</strong>, in the pop-up <strong>Add Group</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>channel, select the channels to form a group, and then click <strong>Save</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Delete a channel group: Select the check box of any channel</li>
</ul>
<p>group, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Edit a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group</li>
</ul>
<p>and then click <strong>Modify</strong>, or double-click on the group. The <strong>Modify Channel Group </strong>dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Move up </strong>or <strong>Move down </strong>to adjust the position of channel</li>
</ul>
<p>group.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-17</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark221"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings. TIPS</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift</p>
<p>to switch between (image switching is allowed) and &#8216;•=?&gt; (image switching is</p>
<p>not allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>On the navigation bar, click</td>
<td>o</td>
<td>to enable the tour and click</td>
<td></td>
<td>to disable</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>it.</p>
<p><strong>Adding a Channel Group</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark222"> Figure 5-44.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="587" height="340" class="wp-image-2134" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 97" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 456" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97.jpeg 587w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-97-300x174.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 587px) 100vw, 587px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-44</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark222"></a> Step 2 Select the channels that you want to group for tour. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark223"> Figure 5-45.</a></p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you want to select more than one channel, in the <strong>Window Split </strong>list, do not select <strong>View 1</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="587" height="337" class="wp-image-2135" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 98" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 457" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98.jpeg 587w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-98-300x172.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 587px) 100vw, 587px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-45</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark223"></a><strong>Modifying a Channel Group</strong></p>
<p>Double-click on a channel group, the <strong>Modify Channel Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark224"> Figure</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark224">5-46.</a></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark224"></a> You can modify channel group and click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="572" height="323" class="wp-image-2136" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 99" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 458" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99.jpeg 572w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-99-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 572px) 100vw, 572px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-46</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark225"></a> 5.3 Entering Main Menu</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed, Click Main Menu and then login the system. The Main Menu is displayed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark227"> Figure 5-47.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="866" height="513" class="wp-image-2137" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 100" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 459" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100.jpeg 866w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-300x178.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-768x455.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-100-810x480.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 866px) 100vw, 866px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark227"></a> Figure 5-47</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td colspan="3">Function tiles</td>
<td>Includes eleven function tiles: <strong>Video</strong>, <strong>Backup</strong>, <strong>Camera</strong>, <strong>Network</strong>, <strong>Event</strong>, <strong>intelligent</strong>, <strong>Storage</strong>, <strong>Display, Account, System</strong>, and <strong>Info</strong>. Click each tile to open the configuration interface of the tile.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Video</strong>: Search for and play back the recorded video saved on the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Backup</strong>: Search and back up the video files to the local PC or</li>
</ul>
<p>external storage device such as USB storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Camera</strong>: Configure the Encode settings of camera, remote device,</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshot settings etc.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Network</strong>: Configure the network parameter (TCP/IP), Port settings,</li>
</ul>
<p>InstaOn Cloud etc.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Event</strong>: Search for alarm information and configure alarm event</li>
</ul>
<p>actions.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Intelligent</strong>: Configure the behavior detections by drawing rules for</li>
</ul>
<p>detecting tripwire, intrusion, abandoned objects, and missing objects, POS (Point of Sale), Face Detection and loT.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Storage</strong>: Hard disk details, record plan configuration for video and</li>
</ul>
<p>snapshot.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Display</strong>: Configure the display effect such as displaying content,</li>
</ul>
<p>image transparency, and resolution, and enable the zero-channel function.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Account</strong>: Create, Delete, Modify user account or user group and</li>
</ul>
<p>Onvif User.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>System</strong>: General settings for DVR (WITHOUT HDD) like as date &amp;</li>
</ul>
<p>time, language settings and PTZ settings.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Info</strong>: Manage Log files and firmware version with device details..</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td colspan="3">Live</td>
<td><strong>Click </strong>to go to the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>D</strong></td>
<td>When you point to <strong>^3, </strong>the current user account is displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td></td>
<td>■ ■</td>
<td></td>
<td>Click Q, select <strong>Logout</strong>, <strong>Reboot</strong>, or <strong>Shutdown </strong>according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Displays <strong>Cell Phone Client </strong>and <strong>Device SN </strong>QR Code.</p>
<ul>
<li>Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to</li>
</ul>
<p>add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device from your cell phone.</p>
<ul>
<li>Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to</li>
</ul>
<p>the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual. You can also configure InstaOn function in the local configurations. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark129">&#8220;5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-18</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark228"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark229"></a> 5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras</p>
<p>PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around view to the camera.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Before operating PTZ, please assure the network connection between PTZ and the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark231"></a> Configuring PTZ Connection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to configure the PTZ connection settings before use.</p>
<ul>
<li>Local connection: RS485 Port for connecting Speed Dome or coaxial cable for connecting coaxial camera.</li>
<li>Remote connection: local area network.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ PTZ</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark233"> Figure 5-48.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="829" height="464" class="wp-image-2138" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 101" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 460" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101.jpeg 829w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-101-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 829px) 100vw, 829px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-48</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark233"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the PTZ connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark234"> Table 5-19.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ camera to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Local: Connect through RS485 port or coaxial cable.</li>
<li>Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ</li>
</ul>
<p>camera to the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Control Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Control Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Serial </strong>or <strong>HDCVI</strong>. For HDCVI series product, please select HDCVI. The control signal is sent to the PTZ through the coaxial cable. For the serial mode, the control signal is sent to the PTZ through the RS485 port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol</td>
<td>In the <strong>Protocol </strong>list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera, for example, select <strong>HDCVI3.0</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>In the <strong>Address </strong>box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1. CO NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Address</td>
<td>The entered address must be the same with the address configured on</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the PTZ camera; otherwise the PTZ camera cannot be controlled from</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Baudrate</td>
<td>In the <strong>Baudrate </strong>list, select the baudrate for the PTZ camera. The default is 9600.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data Bits</td>
<td>The default is 8.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stop Bits</td>
<td>The default is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark234"></a> Parity</td>
<td>The default is NONE.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-19</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark235"></a> Working with PTZ Control Panel</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions, adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark237"></a> Basic PTZ Control Panel</p>
<p>Right-click on the live view screen and then select <strong>PTZ</strong>. The PTZ control panel is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark239">Figure 5-49.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="379" height="168" class="wp-image-2139" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 102" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 461" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102.jpeg 379w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-102-300x133.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 379px) 100vw, 379px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-49</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2140" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-103.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 103" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 462"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark239"></a> The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Speed</td>
<td>Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the movement will be.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Zoom</td>
<td><strong>3: </strong>Wide angle.</p>
<p><strong>^3: </strong>Long shot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Focus</td>
<td><strong>3: </strong>Zoom in. <strong>^3: </strong>Zoom out.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Iris</td>
<td>3: Small.</p>
<p>^3: Large.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ movement</td>
<td>Supports eight directions.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">Fast positioning button.</p>
<p>• Positioning: Click ^3 to enter the fast positioning screen, and</p>
<p>then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to this point and move it to the middle of the screen.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square on</p>
<p>the view. The square supports zooming.</p>
<p>O Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is</p>
<p>to zoom in.</p>
<p>O The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function and can only be controlled through mouse operations.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Click U, you can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down) PTZ movement through mouse operation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">Click ^3 to open the expanded PTZ control panel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-20</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark240"></a> Expanded PTZ Control Panel</p>
<p>On the basic PTZ control panel, click</p>
<p>to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more</p>
<p>options. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark242"> Figure 5-50.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2141" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-104.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 104" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 463"></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="590" height="164" class="wp-image-2142" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 105" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 464" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105.jpeg 590w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-105-300x83.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 590px) 100vw, 590px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-50</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark242"></a> • The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.</p>
<p>• Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>01</strong></td>
<td>Preset</td>
<td></td>
<td>Auto Pan</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>A * *-•</td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="2">Flip</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Pattern</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Reset</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3"></td>
<td>Autoscan</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Click the <strong>AUX Config </strong>icon to open the PTZ functions settings interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>AUX Switch</td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Click the <strong>Enter Menu </strong>icon to open the <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-21</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark243"></a> Configuring PTZ Functions
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark245"></a> Configuring Presets</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="35" class="wp-image-2143" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-106.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 106" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 465"></p>
<p>The <strong>Preset </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark247"> Figure 5-51.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="514" height="327" class="wp-image-2144" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 107" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 466" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107.jpeg 514w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-107-300x191.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 514px) 100vw, 514px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-51</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark247"></a> Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Preset </strong>box, enter the value to represent the required position.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Setting </strong>to complete the preset settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark248"></a> Configuring Tours</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click the <strong>Tour </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Tour </strong>tab is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark250"> Figure 5-52.</a></p>
<p><strong>PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border</strong></p>
<p><strong>Preset i</strong></p>
<p><strong>Patrol&#8230; o</strong></p>
<p><strong>Add Preset</strong></p>
<p><strong>Del Preset</strong></p>
<p><strong>Del Tour</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-52</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark250"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Patrol No</strong>. box, enter the value for the tour route.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Preset </strong>box, enter the preset value.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Add Preset</strong>.</p>
<p>A preset will be added for this tour.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can repeat adding more presets.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Del Preset </strong>to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark251"></a> Configuring Patterns</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="36" class="wp-image-2145" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-108.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 108" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 467"></p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click the <strong>Pattern </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Pattern </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark253"> Figure 5-53.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="511" height="324" class="wp-image-2146" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 109" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 468" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109.jpeg 511w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-109-300x190.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 511px) 100vw, 511px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-53</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark253"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Pattern </strong>box, enter the value for pattern.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Start </strong>to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.</p>
<p>Step 5 On the <strong>PTZ </strong>interface, click <strong>End </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark254"></a> Configuring AutoScan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click .</p>
<p>The <strong>PTZ </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click the <strong>Border </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Border </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark256"> Figure 5-54.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="514" height="326" class="wp-image-2147" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 110" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 469" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110.jpeg 514w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-110-300x190.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 514px) 100vw, 514px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-54</p>
<p>Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right borders.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark256"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark257"></a> Calling PTZ Functions</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark259"> Figure 5-55.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>a.<strong> Speed 5</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>No. 0</strong></td>
<td><em>9</em></td>
<td>▼</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>— Zoom</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>&lt; i.Q ► _</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td>0|</td>
<td></td>
<td>• • 1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>— Focus</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><sup>v</sup> 8 — Iris</strong></td>
<td>+</td>
<td>iol <img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" />*</td>
<td></td>
<td>0</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-55</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark259"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark260"></a> Calling Presets</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the preset that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click [Si to call the preset.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click [Si again to stop calling the preset.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark262"></a> Calling Tours</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the tour that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click to call the tour.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2148" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-111.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 111" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 470"></p>
<p>again to stop calling the tour.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark264"></a> Calling Patterns</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the pattern that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Call <strong>I9l </strong>to call the pattern.</p>
<p>The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click ISI again to stop calling the pattern.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark266"></a> Calling AutoScan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the <strong>No. </strong>box, enter the value of the border that you want to call.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click SI.</p>
<p>The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>l^l </strong>again to stop auto canning.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark268"></a> Calling AutoPan</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1</p>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2149" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-112.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 112" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 471"></p>
<p>to start moving in horizontal direction.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click s</p>
<p>again to stop moving.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark270"></a> Using AUX Button</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click , the AUX setting interface is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark272">Figure 5-56.</a></p>
<ul>
<li>In the <strong>Direct Aux </strong>list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.</li>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark272"></a> In the <strong>Aux Num </strong>box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the</li>
</ul>
<p>decoder.</p>
<p><strong>AUX</strong></p>
<p><strong>On Off</strong></p>
<p><strong>On Off</strong></p>
<p><strong>Direct </strong>Aux</p>
<p><strong>NONE</strong></p>
<p><strong>Aux Num</strong></p>
<p><strong>1</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-56</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark273"></a> Calling OSD Menu</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>For the coaxial camera, you can call the OSD menu through the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark259"> Figure 5-55.</a></p>
<p>Step 1</p>
<p>On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2150" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-113.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 113" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 472"></p>
<p>The <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark275"> Figure 5-57.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="473" height="310" class="wp-image-2151" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 114" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 473" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114.jpeg 473w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-114-300x197.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 473px) 100vw, 473px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-57</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark275"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Enter</strong>.</p>
<p>The OSD menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark276"> Figure 5-58.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="331" class="wp-image-2152" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 115" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 474" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115.jpeg 528w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-115-300x188.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-58</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark276"></a> Step 3 On the <strong>MENU OPERATION </strong>interface, click the arrow button to select the onscreen parameters.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Enter </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark277"></a> 5.5 Configuring Camera Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="933" height="525" class="wp-image-2153" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 116" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 475" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116.jpeg 933w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-116-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 933px) 100vw, 933px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark279"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark280"></a> Configuring Image Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the image settings such as saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness for</p>
<p>each connected camera.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ IMAGE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMAGE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark282"> Figure 5-59 </a>for analog channel and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark283"> Figure 5</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark283">60 </a>for digital channel.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="455" class="wp-image-2154" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 117" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 476" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-300x158.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-768x405.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-117-810x428.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark282"></a> Figure 5-59</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="873" height="490" class="wp-image-2155" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 118" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 477" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118.jpeg 873w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-118-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 873px) 100vw, 873px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-60</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark283"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the image parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark284"> Table 5-22.</a></p>
<p>On the digital channel interface, click <strong>More Setting </strong>to display more parameters.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Cable Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Cable Type </strong>list, select the cable type that the camera uses. EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>In the <strong>Period </strong>list, select a time period for the image settings. The image settings will be only used during the selected period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Effective Time</td>
<td>Enable the effective function.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Effective Time </strong>box, enter the start time and end time for the period you selected.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Saturation</td>
<td>Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Contrast</td>
<td>Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Brightness</td>
<td>Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Hue</td>
<td>Adjusts the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sharpness</td>
<td>Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Enhance</td>
<td>Adjusts the image definition. The bigger the value is, the clearer the image will become, but there will be more noises.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>NR</td>
<td>Reduces the noises from image. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Config File</td>
<td>In the <strong>Config File </strong>list, select <strong>Day</strong>, <strong>Night</strong>, <strong>Normal</strong>, or <strong>Switch By Period</strong>. The system configures the parameters correspondingly.</p>
<ul>
<li>Day: Apply the configuration during daytime.</li>
<li>Night: Apply the configuration during nighttime.</li>
<li>Normal: Apply the configuration during day and night.</li>
<li>Switch by Period: If you select this option, you need to configure</li>
</ul>
<p>the sunrise time and sunset time where you are located.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mirror</td>
<td>Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be switched. It is disabled by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3D Denoise</td>
<td>This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better the effect.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Flip</td>
<td>In the <strong>Flip </strong>list, you can select <strong>180° </strong>to change the video image display.</p>
<p>By default, the setting is <strong>No Flip</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Light</td>
<td>In the <strong>Light </strong>list, select <strong>Close </strong>or <strong>Enable </strong>to use the backlight compensation or not.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Scene Mode</td>
<td>Configure the white balance to adjust the general hue of the image.</p>
<p>The default setting is <strong>Auto</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto: Automatically apply white balance to different colors to</li>
</ul>
<p>make the image color display normally.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sunny: Apply the threshold value to sunny environment.</li>
<li>Night: Apply the threshold value to night.</li>
<li>Customized: Manually adjust the Red Gain and Blue Gain</li>
</ul>
<p>values.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Day &amp; Night</td>
<td>Configure the color and black&amp;white mode of the image. This setting is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting is <strong>Auto</strong>. • Color: The camera outputs color image only.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and</li>
</ul>
<p>whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&amp;white image is output.</p>
<ul>
<li>B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.</li>
<li>By Time: The camera outputs image according to the configure</li>
</ul>
<p>the sunrise time and sunset time.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-22</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark284"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark285"></a> Configuring Encode Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera^ ENCODE ^ Encode</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Encode </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark287"> Figure 5-61.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="845" height="478" class="wp-image-2156" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 119" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 478" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119.jpeg 845w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-119-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 845px) 100vw, 845px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-61</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark287"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark288"> Table 5-23.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Smart Codec</td>
<td>Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Main Stream: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, <strong>MD </strong>(Motion</li>
</ul>
<p>Detect), or <strong>Alarm</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Compression</td>
<td>In the <strong>Compression </strong>list, select the encode mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.265: Main profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high</li>
</ul>
<p>definition. This setting is recommended.</p>
<ul>
<li>H.264: General profile encoding.</li>
<li>H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher</li>
</ul>
<p>bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video.</p>
<p>The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Frame Rate (FPS)</td>
<td>Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution.</p>
<p>Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.</p>
<p>However, the specific range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Quality</td>
<td>This function is available if you select <strong>VBR </strong>in the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>List. The higher the value, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I Frame Interval</td>
<td>The interval between two reference frames.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bit Rate (Kb/S)</td>
<td>In the <strong>Bit Rate </strong>list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video</td>
<td>Enable the function for sub stream.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Encode</td>
<td rowspan="3">Click <strong>More Setting</strong>, the <strong>More Setting </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main</li>
</ul>
<p>stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Source: In the <strong>Audio Source </strong>list, you can select <strong>LOCAL</strong></li>
</ul>
<p>and <strong>HDCVI</strong>.</p>
<p>O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio input port.</p>
<p>O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera.</p>
<ul>
<li>Audio Format: In the <strong>Audio Forma</strong>t list, select a format that you</li>
</ul>
<p>need.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Audio Source</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark288"></a> Audio Format</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-23</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2157" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-120.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 120" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 479"></p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark289"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Camera^ Encode &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark291"> Figure 5-62.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="844" height="472" class="wp-image-2158" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 121" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 480" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121.jpeg 844w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-121-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 844px) 100vw, 844px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-62</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark291"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark292"> Table 5-24.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Snap</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manual Snap </strong>list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mode</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Human Face</strong>, <strong>Event</strong>, or <strong>General </strong>as the event type for which you want to take a snapshot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Size</td>
<td>In the <strong>Image Size </strong>list, select a value for the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Quality</td>
<td>Configures the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark292"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Configures or customizes the snapshot frequency.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-24</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark293"></a> Configuring Overlay Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure to display system time and channel name on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Overlay</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Overlay </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark295"> Figure 5-63.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="874" height="489" class="wp-image-2159" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 122" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 481" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122.jpeg 874w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-122-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 874px) 100vw, 874px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-63</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark295"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the text overlay parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark296"> Table 5-25.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Display</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Time Display </strong>check box to display the system time on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Time Display </strong>list, select time display style.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark296"></a> Channel Title</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Channel Title </strong>check box to display the channel name on each channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Channel Title </strong>box, enter the name for the selected channel.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-25</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark297"></a> Configuring Covered Area Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Cover-Area</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Cover-Area </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark299"> Figure 5-64.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="883" height="494" class="wp-image-2160" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 123" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 482" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123.jpeg 883w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-123-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 883px) 100vw, 883px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-64</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark299"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the covered area parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark300"> Table 5-26.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview</p>
<p>Record</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Preview: Select the <strong>Preview </strong>check box to apply the configured</li>
</ul>
<p>covered block to the selected channel window in the live view screen.</p>
<ul>
<li>Record: Select the <strong>Record </strong>check box to apply the configured</li>
</ul>
<p>covered block to the selected channel window during recording.</p>
<p>To configure covering block, do the following:</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the <strong>Preview </strong>check box or the <strong>Record </strong>check box, or</li>
</ol>
<p>select the both. The &#8220;1,2, 3, 4&#8221; buttons are activated.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click the buttons to select blocks.</li>
<li>A triangle solid black block is displayed. You can drag the block</li>
</ol>
<p>to the area that you want to cover and adjust the size of the block.</p>
<ol>
<li>You can configure total 4 covered blocks.</li>
</ol>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-26</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark300"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark301"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark302"></a> Configuring Channel Type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the channel type as <strong>Analog </strong>or <strong>IP </strong>channel.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Camera ^ CHANNEL TYPE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>CHANNEL TYPE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark304"> Figure 5-65.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="463" class="wp-image-2161" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 124" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 483" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-124-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-65</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark304"></a> Step 2 Configure the channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>Analog Channel: Select the transmission medium such as CVI, CVBS, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</li>
<li>IP Channel: Select a channel for IP camera from the last channel number, for example, in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark304"> Figure 5-65,</a> select from the <strong>17-24 </strong>check box. Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The 17-24 channels are only for IP camera and the range changes dependent on the model you purchased.</li>
<li>The channel selection for analog camera or IP camera are in sequence, for example, if you want to select channels for IP camera, you need to select the <strong>17-24 </strong>check box first, and then you cannot jump to select the channel <strong>15 </strong>directly until you have selected the channel <strong>16</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark305"></a> 5.5.7 Upgrading Coaxial Camera</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ COAXIAL UPGRADE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>COAXIAL UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark307"> Figure 5-66.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="897" height="506" class="wp-image-2162" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 125" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 484" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125.jpeg 897w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-125-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 897px) 100vw, 897px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-66</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark307"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Browse</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Select the upgrade file and click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>COAXIAL UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>You need to insert the USB storage device that contains the upgrading files.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the check box of the channel that you want to upgrade.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Start Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>If the upgrading is successful, the system pops up a message indicating the upgrading</p>
<p>is completed. If the upgrading is failed, please check if the Device</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark308"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark309"></a> 5.6 Configuring Remote Devices</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark311"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark312"></a> 5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>This function is available after you have configured the channel type as IP channel as described in previous section, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark301">&#8220;5.5.6 Configuring Channel Type.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>You can add remote devices by adding the IP address.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Registration</strong>, the <strong>Registration </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark314"> Figure 5-67.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="842" height="473" class="wp-image-2163" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 126" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 485" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126.jpeg 842w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-126-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 842px) 100vw, 842px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-67</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark314"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Uninitialized</td>
<td>Enable the <strong>Uninitialized </strong>function, the uninitialized devices out of the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Initialize</td>
<td>Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list, and the click <strong>Initialize </strong>to start initializing device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Filter</td>
<td>In the <strong>Show Filter </strong>list, select the remote device type that you want to display in the searched device list.</p>
<ul>
<li>None: Display all types of devices.</li>
<li>IPC: Display the front-end devices.</li>
<li>DVR (WITHOUT HDD): Display all storage devices such as</li>
</ul>
<p>NVR, DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and HCVR.</p>
<ul>
<li>OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or DVR</li>
</ul>
<p>(WITHOUT HDD) type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Searched Device List</td>
<td>Displays the searched devices. You can view the device information such as status, IP address.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Search</td>
<td>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>, the searched devices display in the searched device list.</p>
<p>To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the IP address, Manufacturer, Type, MAC Address, Port, or Device Name text. For example, click the IP address text, the sequence icon OZES is displayed.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>&#8220;*&#8221; is displayed next to the added device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Add</td>
<td>In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want to add.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manual Add</td>
<td>Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP address, channel selection. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark328">&#8220;5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark328">Manually.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Added Device List</td>
<td>Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device, and view the device information.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Select the check box of the added device, and then click <strong>Delete </strong>to delete the added device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Import</td>
<td>Select the searched devices and then click <strong>Import </strong>to import the devices in batches.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Export</td>
<td>Select the added devices and then click <strong>Export</strong>. The exported devices information is saved into the USB storage device.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-27</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark315"></a> 5.6.1.2 Initializing Remote Devices</p>
<p>You can reset the password and IP address of the remote devices through initializing.</p>
<p>Step <strong>1 </strong>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The searched devices are displayed in the table. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark317"> Figure 5-68.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="473" class="wp-image-2164" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 127" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 486" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-127-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-68</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark317"></a> Step 2 Enable the Initialized function.</p>
<p>The uninitialized devices are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark318"> Figure 5-69.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="444" class="wp-image-2165" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 128" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 487" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-128-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-69</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark318"></a> Step 3 Select the uninitialized device that you want to initialize.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Initialize</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Enter Password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark319"> Figure 5-70</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="417" class="wp-image-2166" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 129" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 488" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-129-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-70</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark319"></a> Step 5 Configure the password and email information.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>If you select the <strong>Using current device password and email info </strong>check box, the remote device automatically uses the current password and email information, so you do not need to set the password and email address again and can go to Step 6.</p>
<ol>
<li>Clear the <strong>Using current device password and email info </strong>check box.</li>
</ol>
<p>The password setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark320"> Figure 5-71.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="417" class="wp-image-2167" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 130" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 489" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-130-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-71</p>
<p>2) Configure the settings for the password setting parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark321"> Table 5-28.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark320"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User</td>
<td>The default is admin.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark321"></a> Confirm Password</td>
<td>Please enter a strong password according to the password strength bar indication.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-28</p>
<p>3) Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Password Protection </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark322"> Figure 5-72</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="598" height="418" class="wp-image-2168" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 131" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 490" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131.jpeg 598w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131-300x210.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-131-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 598px) 100vw, 598px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-72</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark322"></a> Select the <strong>Email Address </strong>box and enter the email address that you want to reserve for password reset in the future.</li>
</ol>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>If you do not want to set the reserved email address, click <strong>Skip</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>NETWORK </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark323"> Figure 5-73.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="538" class="wp-image-2169" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 132" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 491" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132.jpeg 763w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-132-300x212.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-73</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark323"></a> Step <em>C</em> Configure the IP address.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the <strong>DHCP </strong>check box, you do not need to enter the IP address information, because the system will allocate one IP address to the remote device.</li>
<li>Select the <strong>STATIC </strong>check box, you need to enter the IP address, subnet mast, default gateway, and incremental value. The system will allocate the IP address to the remote devices by progressively increasing the last part of the IP address when initializing devices in batches.</li>
</ul>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>When configuring IP address for multiple remote devices which were not in the same network segment, these remote devices will belong to the same network segment after configuration.</p>
<p>Step 8 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The initializing is started. After the process is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark324"> Figure 5-74.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="583" class="wp-image-2170" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 133" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 492" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-768x541.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-133-810x571.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-74</p>
<p>Step 9 Click <strong>Finished </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark324"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark325"></a> 5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Automatically</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Registration </strong>interface, click <strong>Device Search</strong></p>
<p>The searched devices are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark327"> Figure 5-75.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="786" height="439" class="wp-image-2171" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 134" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 493" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134.jpeg 786w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-134-768x429.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 786px) 100vw, 786px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-75</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark327"></a> Step 2 Select the check box of the device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The device is added into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can also double-click the device to add it into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</li>
<li>You can add devices in batches.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark328"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark329"></a> 5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices Manually</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>Registration </strong>interface, click <strong>Manual Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Manual Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark331"> Figure 5-76.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="492" height="568" class="wp-image-2172" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 135" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 494" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135.jpeg 492w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-135-260x300.jpeg 260w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 492px) 100vw, 492px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-76</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark331"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the manual adding device parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark332"> Table 5-29.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want use on the Device to connect the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Manufacturer</td>
<td>In the <strong>Manufacturer </strong>list, select the manufacturer of the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td>In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device. CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>RTSP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td>Enter the user name of the remote device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>Enter the password of the user for the remote device</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Remote Channel</td>
<td>Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that you want to add.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Decoder Buffer</td>
<td>In the <strong>Decoder Buffer </strong>list, select <strong>Default</strong>, <strong>Realtime</strong>, or <strong>Fluent</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark332"></a> Protocol Type</td>
<td>Select <strong>Auto</strong>, <strong>TCP</strong>, <strong>UDP</strong>, or <strong>MULTICAST</strong>. The default is <strong>TCP</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-29</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>• Only one device can be added manually at one time.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="32" height="36" class="wp-image-2173" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-136.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 136" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 495"></p>
<p>indicates successful connection and</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="36" height="32" class="wp-image-2174" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-137.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 137" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 496"></p>
<p>indicates connection failed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark333"></a> Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can modify and delete the added devices.</p>
<ul>
<li>To modify the remote devices, do the following:</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Click □ or double-click a device.</p>
<p>The <strong>Edit </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark335"> Figure 5-77.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="476" height="548" class="wp-image-2175" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 138" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 497" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138.jpeg 476w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-138-261x300.jpeg 261w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 476px) 100vw, 476px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-77</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark335"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to modify settings for.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the user name and password to other channels.</p>
<ul>
<li>To delete one or more added devices, do the following:</li>
</ul>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="36" class="wp-image-2176" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-139.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 139" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 498"></p>
<p>to delete one device</p>
<p>o Select the check box of the devices that you want to delete, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark336"></a> Modifying IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can modify a single IP address or multiple IP addresses of remote devices at the one time.</p>
<p>• To modify a single IP address, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, click □ for the device that you want to modify IP.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark338"> Figure 5-78.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="499" height="413" class="wp-image-2177" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 140" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 499" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140.jpeg 499w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-140-300x248.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 499px) 100vw, 499px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-78</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark338"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 3 Enable the <strong>Add </strong>function to add the device into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>• To modify IP address in batches, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, select the devices that you want to modify IP address in batches.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click □.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark339"> Figure 5-79.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="462" height="384" class="wp-image-2178" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 141" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 500" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141.jpeg 462w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-141-300x249.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 462px) 100vw, 462px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-79</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark339"></a> Step 3 Enable the <strong>Batch Modify </strong>function.</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for start IP address (the IP address is allocated in sequence), subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 5 Enable the <strong>Add </strong>function to add the devices into the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark340"></a> Exporting IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export the added IP address to the USB storage device.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The exported information is saved in .csv file, which includes IP address, port number, channel number, manufacturer, user name, and password.</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click <strong>Export.</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark342"> Figure 5-80.</a></p>
<p>Browse</p>
<p>Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) • 3.71 GB/3.73 GB(Free/Total) Refresh Format</p>
<p>Address /</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Play</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ {fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb}</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>là printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>lg kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>dk</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1 SmartPlayer.exe.lnk</td>
<td>L7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td><strong>5&#8242;</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl ty.lnk</td>
<td>1.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>n</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>Ale</td>
<td><strong>3</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>New Folder OK Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-80</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark342"></a> Step 3 Configure the save path.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>A pop-up message indicating &#8220;Successfully exported&#8221; is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark343"></a> Importing IP Address</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add remote devices by importing IP address information.</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click <strong>Import</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark345"> Figure 5-81.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="564" class="wp-image-2179" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 142" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 501" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142-300x215.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-142-768x550.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-81</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark345"></a> Step 3 Select the file that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to start importing.</p>
<p>After importing is completed, a pop-up message indicating &#8220;The import succeeded&#8221; is displayed.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>If the IP address that you want to import already exists in the Device, the system will pop up a message to ask you whether to overwrite the existing content.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to replace the existing one.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Cancel </strong>to add it as a separate device in the <strong>Added Device </strong>area.</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You can edit the exported .csv file and be cautious not to change the file format; otherwise the file cannot be imported as it will be judged as invalid.</li>
<li>The language of .csv file must match the Device language.</li>
<li>The import and export through customized protocol is not supported.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark346"></a> 5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices</p>
<p>You can view the status of remote devices and upgrade.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark348"></a> Viewing Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the device information such as connection status, IP address, motion detection, video loss detection, camera name, and manufacturer.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Status</strong>, the <strong>Status </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark350"> Figure 5-82.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="466" class="wp-image-2180" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 143" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 502" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-143-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-82</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark350"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark351"></a> Viewing Firmware Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the device firmware information such as channel number, IP address, manufacturer, system version, video input, audio input, and alarm in.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Firmware</strong>, the <strong>Firmware </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark353"> Figure 5-83.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="899" height="507" class="wp-image-2181" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 144" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 503" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144.jpeg 899w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-144-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 899px) 100vw, 899px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-83</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark353"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark354"></a> Upgrading Remote Devices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ REGISTRATION &gt; Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark356"> Figure 5-84.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="450" class="wp-image-2182" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 145" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 504" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145.jpeg 796w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-145-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 796px) 100vw, 796px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-84</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark356"></a> Step 2 Upgrade the device.</p>
<p>• File Upgrade</p>
<ol>
<li>Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.</li>
<li>Select the devices that you want to upgrade.</li>
<li>Click <strong>File upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>File Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the upgrading files and click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>• Online Upgrade</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>Detect </strong>or select the check box the device that you want to upgrade and click <strong>Manual Check</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>The system starts detecting if there is a new version on the online server.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select the check box of all the devices that have new version.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Online Upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The system will pop up a message to indicate if the upgrading is successful.</li>
<li>You can use the Type list to filter the devices so that you can find the devices</li>
</ul>
<p>quickly.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark357"></a> Configuring Record Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can record video manually or automatically and configure the recording settings to main stream and sub stream respectively.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark359"></a> Enabling Record Control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2183" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-146.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 146" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 505"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access <strong>STORAGE </strong>settings.</li>
<li>Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.</li>
</ul>
<p>To enter the record control interface, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual <em>■&gt;</em> Record Control</strong>. The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark361">Figure 5-85.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="850" height="598" class="wp-image-2184" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 147" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 506" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147.jpeg 850w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-300x211.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-768x540.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-147-810x570.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 850px) 100vw, 850px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-85</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark361"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark362"> Table 5-30.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels.</p>
<p>You can select a single channel or select <strong>All</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record status</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically record according to the record type and</li>
</ul>
<p>recording time as configured in the recording schedule.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected</li>
</ul>
<p>channel.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not record.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark362"></a> Snapshot status</td>
<td>Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-30</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark363"></a> Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark365"></a> You need to configure the storage schedule for the recorded video so that the recorded video can be saved. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark366"></a> Configuring Snapshot Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark368"></a> Configuring Snapshot Trigger</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The snapshot is divided into scheduled snapshot, event triggered snapshot, and face detection triggered snapshot. When the both are enabled, the event triggered snapshot has the priority.</p>
<ul>
<li>If there is no alarm event, the system performs scheduled snapshot.</li>
<li>If there is any alarm event, the system performs event triggered snapshot.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark370"></a> 5.8.1.1 Configuring Scheduled Snapshot</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual </strong>^ <strong>Record Control</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Snapshot </strong>area, enable the snapshot for the channels if needed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark372"> Figure 5­86.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="813" height="567" class="wp-image-2185" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 148" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 507" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148.jpeg 813w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-300x209.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-768x536.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-810x565.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-148-145x100.jpeg 145w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 813px) 100vw, 813px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-86</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark372"></a> Step 4 Select <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Camera </strong>^ <strong>Encode </strong>^ <strong>Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>General</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark373"> Figure 5­87.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="758" height="427" class="wp-image-2186" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 149" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 508" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149.jpeg 758w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-149-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 758px) 100vw, 758px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-87</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark373"></a> Step 6 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you have configured the snapshot schedule, the configuration has been completed.</li>
<li>If you have not configured the snapshot schedule, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">Snapshot Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark374"></a> Configuring Event Triggered Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark376"> Figure 5-88.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="857" height="483" class="wp-image-2187" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 150" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 509" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150.jpeg 857w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-150-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 857px) 100vw, 857px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-88</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark376"></a> Step 3 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event <em>■&gt;</em> VIDEO DETECT</strong>, and select the event type to configure, for example, select the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>tab. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark377"> Figure 5-89.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="894" height="502" class="wp-image-2188" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 151" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 510" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151.jpeg 894w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-151-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 894px) 100vw, 894px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-89</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark377"></a> Step 4 Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box and select the corresponding channel.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark378"></a> Configuring Face Detection Triggered Snapshot</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Camera ^ Encode &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Snapshot </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Human Face</strong>, and then configure other parameters. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark380">Figure 5-90.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="461" class="wp-image-2189" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 152" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 511" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-152-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-90</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark380"></a> Step 3 Select <strong>Main Menu -&gt;Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters &gt; Human Face</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Human Face </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark381"> Figure 5-91.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="880" height="497" class="wp-image-2190" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 153" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 512" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153.jpeg 880w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-153-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 880px) 100vw, 880px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-91</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark381"></a> Step 4 Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box and select the corresponding channel.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark382"></a> Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You need to configure the storage schedule for the snapshot so that the snapshot can be saved.</p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark384"></a> Backing up Snapshots to FTP</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ FTP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FTP </strong>interface is displayed. See Figure 5-92.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="470" class="wp-image-2191" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 154" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 513" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-154-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p>Step 2 Enable the FTP function and configure the parameters. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark785">&#8220;5.17.8</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark785">Configuring FTP Storage Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>The snapshots will be uploaded to FTP for backup.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark386"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark387"></a> 5.9 Playing Back Video</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="906" height="510" class="wp-image-2192" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 155" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 514" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155.jpeg 906w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-155-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 906px) 100vw, 906px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark389"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark390"></a> Enabling Record Control</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2193" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-156.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 156" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 515"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access <strong>STORAGE </strong>settings.</li>
<li>Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.</li>
</ul>
<p>To enter the record control interface, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select <strong>Manual <em>■&gt;</em> Record Control</strong>. The <strong>RECORD </strong>interface is displayed, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark392">Figure 5-93.</a></p>
<p>RECORD</p>
<p>Mainstream All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16</p>
<p>Auto</p>
<p>Manual</p>
<p>Stop</p>
<p>Sub Stream</p>
<p>Auto</p>
<p>Manual</p>
<p>Stop</p>
<p>Snapshot</p>
<p>Enable</p>
<p>Disable</p>
<p>Apply Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-93</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark392"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark393"> 0.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark393"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels.</p>
<p>You can select a single channel or select <strong>All</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record status</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically record according to the record type and</li>
</ul>
<p>recording time as configured in the recording schedule.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected</li>
</ul>
<p>channel.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not record.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot status</td>
<td>Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-31</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark394"></a> Instant Playback</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can use the instant playback function to play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video in any channel. For details about instant playback function, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark172">&#8220;5.2.2.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark172">Instant Playback.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark396"></a> Main Interface of Video Playback</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark398"> Figure 5-94.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="844" height="478" class="wp-image-2194" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 157" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 516" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157.jpeg 844w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-157-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 844px) 100vw, 844px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-94</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark398"></a><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td rowspan="2">Display Window</td>
<td>Display the searched recorded video or picture. It supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel, and 16-channel simultaneously.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>When playing back in a single channel mode, hold down the left</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>mouse button to select the area that you want to enlarge. The</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released. To exit the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>enlarged status, right-click on the image.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Playback</p>
<p>Controls Bar</td>
<td>Playback control buttons. For details about the control buttons, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark399">&#8220;5.9.3.2 Introducing Playback Controls.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>3</td>
<td>Time Bar</td>
<td>Display the type and time period of the current recorded video.</p>
<ul>
<li>In the 4-channel layout, there are four-time bars are</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed; in the other view layouts, only one-time bar is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click on the colored area to start playback from a certain time.</li>
<li>In the situation when you are configuring the settings, rotate</li>
</ul>
<p>the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming from the time point where the playback is located.</p>
<ul>
<li>Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red indicates</li>
</ul>
<p>external alarm; Yellow indicates motion detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple indicates POS events.</p>
<ul>
<li>For some models, when you are clicking on the blank area in</li>
</ul>
<p>the time bar, the system automatically jumps to the next time point where there is a recorded video located.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>4</td>
<td>Play Status</td>
<td>Includes two playback statuses: <strong>Play </strong>and <strong>Stop</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>5</td>
<td>Sync</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Sync </strong>check box to simultaneously play recorded videos of different channels in the same period in multi-channel view.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>No.</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td colspan="7"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>6</td>
<td>Record type</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to define the recording type to search for.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>7</td>
<td>Search type</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the content to play back: <strong>Record</strong>, <strong>PIC</strong>, <strong>Splice Playback</strong>.</p>
<p>For details about the selecting search type, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark403">&#8220;5.9.3.3 Selecting</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark403">Search Type.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>8</td>
<td>Calendar</td>
<td colspan="7">Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays the corresponding record.</p>
<p>The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle under the date.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">9</td>
<td rowspan="3">View Layout and Channel Selection</td>
<td colspan="7">In the <strong>CAM NAME </strong>list, select the channel(s) that you want to play back.</p>
<p>• The window split is decided by how you select the channel(s).</p>
<p>For example, if you select one channel, the playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• Clink</td>
<td>M</td>
<td colspan="3">tn Q\A/itnh thn Qtrnam«;</td>
<td>M</td>
<td rowspan="2">indicates main .</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">stream, and</td>
<td>S</td>
<td colspan="2">indicates sub stream</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>10</td>
<td>Video Splice</td>
<td colspan="7">Splice a section of recorded video and save it. For details about splicing a recorded video, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">&#8220;5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>11</td>
<td>Backup</td>
<td colspan="7">Back up the recorded video files. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark413">&#8220;5.9.3.5 Backing</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark413">up Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>12</td>
<td>List Display</td>
<td colspan="7">This area includes <strong>Mark List </strong>and <strong>File List</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>^3: </strong>Click the <strong>Mark List </strong>button, the marked recorded video</li>
</ul>
<p>list is displayed. Double-click the file to start playing.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>^3: </strong>Click the <strong>File List </strong>button, the searched recorded video</li>
</ul>
<p>list is displayed. You can lock the files. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark440">&#8220;5.9.8</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark440">Using the File List.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>13</td>
<td>Full Screen</td>
<td colspan="7">Click ^3 to display in full screen. In the full screen mode, point to the bottom of the screen, the time bar is displayed. Right-click on the screen to exit full screen mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>14</td>
<td>Time Bar Unit</td>
<td colspan="7">You can select 24hr, 2hr, 1hr, or 30min as the unit of time bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-32</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark399"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark400"></a> Introducing Playback Controls Bar</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can perform the operations such as control the speed of playback, add mark, and take</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark402"></a> snapshots through the playback controls bar. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark402"> Figure 5-95 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark404"> Table 5-33.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="782" height="52" class="wp-image-2195" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 158" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 517" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158.jpeg 782w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158-300x20.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-158-768x51.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 782px) 100vw, 782px" /></p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The play backward function and playback speed are dependent on the product version. The actual product shall govern. You can also contact the technical support to consult the hardware version information.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□. m</strong></td>
<td>Play/Pause.</p>
<p>During playing back, you can switch between play and pause.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Stop.</p>
<p>During playing back, you can click the <strong>Stop </strong>button to stop playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□.m</strong></td>
<td>Play Backward.</p>
<p>• During playing back, click the <strong>Play Backward </strong>button to</p>
<p>backward play the recorded video, the button switches to EH; click EH to stop playing backward.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> During playing back, click to start playing forward.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□. □</strong></td>
<td>Previous Frame/Next Frame.</p>
<p>* When the playback is paused, click <strong>UJ </strong>or click <strong>U3 </strong>to play single-frame recorded video.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> When playing back single-frame recorded video, click <strong>13 </strong>to</p>
<p>start playing forward.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Slow Playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of slow</li>
</ul>
<p>playback as SlowX1/2, SlowX1/4, SlowX1/8, or SlowX1/16.</p>
<ul>
<li>During fast playback, click ^3 to slow down the speed of fast</li>
</ul>
<p>playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td>Fast Playback.</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of fast playback</p>
<p>as FastX2, FastX4, FastX8, or FastX16.</p>
<p>* During slow playback, click ^3 to speed up slow playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>El. d</strong></td>
<td>Previous Day/Next Day.</p>
<p>Click ^3 or click <strong>C2 </strong>to play the previous day or next day of the current recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>L o |</strong></td>
<td>Adjust volume of playback.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Smart Search. For details about the using the smart search, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark417">&#8220;5.9.4 Smart Search.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Icon</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Function</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>El</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">In the full screen mode, click to take a snapshot and save into</p>
<p>the USB storage device or mobile HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">Add Mark for the recorded view. For details about adding mark, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark420">&#8220;5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Hide POS Hide.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td rowspan="3">During single-channel playback, click information on the screen.</td>
<td><strong>^9</strong></td>
<td rowspan="3">to display or hide POS</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-33</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark403"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark404"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark405"></a> Selecting Search Type</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>From R/W HDD</strong>: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark407">Figure 5-96.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="296" height="113" class="wp-image-2196" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-159.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 159" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 518"></p>
<p>Figure 5-96</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark407"></a><strong>From I/O Device</strong>: Recorded videos playback from external storage device. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark409"> Figure 5­97.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>Click <strong>Browse</strong>, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play. Double­click the video file or click 13 to start playing.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="377" height="166" class="wp-image-2197" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 160" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 519" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160.jpeg 377w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160-300x132.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-160-375x166.jpeg 375w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 377px) 100vw, 377px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-97</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark408"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark409"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark410"></a> 5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark412"></a> During playback, clip sections of recorded video and save to the USB storage device. For the video clip interface, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark412"> Figure 5-98.</a></p>
<p>00:00:00 &#8211; 00:00:00</p>
<p>Figure 5-98</p>
<p>Step 1 Select a recorded video that you want to play.</p>
<p>• Click to start playing from the beginning.</p>
<p>• Double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.</p>
<p>Step 2</p>
<p>Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2198" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-161.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 161" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 520"></p>
<p>to start clipping.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="37" height="33" class="wp-image-2199" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-162.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 162" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 521"></p>
<p>to stop clipping.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click .</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>dialog box is displayed. You can back up the files.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>You can clip the video of a single-channel or multiple channels.</li>
<li>Maximum 1024 files can be backed up at one time.</li>
<li>The files that are selected in the <strong>File List </strong>cannot be clipped.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark413"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark414"></a> 5.9.3.5 Backing up Recorded Video</p>
<p>You can back up the recorded video file or splice video file into the USB storage device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following two types of files:</p>
<ul>
<li>Recorded video file: Click ^3, the <strong>File List </strong>area is displayed. Select the file(s) that you want to back up.</li>
<li>Splice video file. For details about splicing video file, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">&#8220;5.9.3.4 Clipping</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark408">Recorded Video.</a>&#8220;</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 2 Click .</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark416"> Figure 5-99.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="585" class="wp-image-2200" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 163" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 522" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-768x543.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-163-810x572.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-99</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark416"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Backup</strong>.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>If you do not want to back the file, clear the check box.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark417"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark418"></a> 5.9.4 Smart Search</p>
<p>During playback, you can analyze a certain area to find if there was any motion detection event occurred. The system will display the images with motion events of the recorded video.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>To use the Smart Search function, you need to enable the motion detection for the channel by selecting <strong>Main Menu ^ Alarm ^ Video Detect ^ Motion Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>To use the Smart Search function, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>CAME NAME </strong>list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>13 </strong>or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="45" class="wp-image-2201" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-164.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 164" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 523"></p>
<p>The grid is displayed on the screen.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only single-channel supports smart search.</li>
<li>If multi-channels are selected, double-click on the channel window to display this channel only on the screen, and then you can start using smart search function.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 5 Drag the pointer to select the searching area. ED NOTE</p>
<p>The grid area supports 22&#215;18(PAL) and 22&#215;15(NTSC).</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="55" height="48" class="wp-image-2202" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-165.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 165" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 524"></p>
<p>The screen starts playing back the motional splices of recorded video for the selected searching area.</p>
<p>Step 7</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="45" class="wp-image-2203" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-166.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 166" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 525"></p>
<p>to exit the playback.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark420"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark421"></a> 5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video</p>
<p>You can mark the recording for somewhere important. Then you can easily find the marked recording by searching time and mark name.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark423"></a> Marking a Video</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the playback mode, click</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Mark </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark425"> Figure 5-100.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="483" height="229" class="wp-image-2204" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 167" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 526" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167.jpeg 483w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-167-300x142.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 483px) 100vw, 483px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-100</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark425"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Name </strong>box, enter a name.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>This marked video file displays in the <strong>Mark List</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark426"></a> Playing Back Marked Video</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>This function is supported on single-channel playback.</p>
<p>Step 1 In the <strong>CAME NAME </strong>list, select one channel.</p>
<p>Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="39" class="wp-image-2205" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-168.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 168" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 527"></p>
<p>The Mark List interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark428"> Figure 5-101.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="250" height="477" class="wp-image-2206" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 169" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 528" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169.jpeg 250w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-169-157x300.jpeg 157w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 250px) 100vw, 250px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-101</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark428"></a> Step 3 Double-click the file that you want to play back.</p>
<p>To search the marked video by time, in the <strong>SEARCH </strong>box on the top of the interface,</p>
<p>enter the time, and then click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="33" class="wp-image-2208" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-170.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 170" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 529"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark429"></a> Playing Back Time before the Mark</p>
<p>You can configure to play N seconds of the marked video before the marked time.</p>
<p>Step 1 In the <strong>Name </strong>box, enter the name of a marked video.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Playback time before the mark </strong>box, enter N seconds.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2209" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-171.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 171" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 530"></p>
<p>The playback starts from N seconds before the marked time.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>If there is N seconds exist before the marked time, the playback starts from N seconds before the marked time. If there is not, it plays back as much as there is.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark431"></a> Managing Marked Video</p>
<p>In the <strong>Mark List </strong>interface, click ^3, the Manager interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark433"> Figure 5-102.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="618" height="591" class="wp-image-2210" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 172" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 531" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172.jpeg 618w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-172-300x287.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 618px) 100vw, 618px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-102</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark433"></a> Be default, it manages all the marked videos of the selected channel.</li>
<li>To search the marked video, select channel number from the <strong>Channel </strong>list, enter time in <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, and then click <strong>Search</strong>.</li>
<li>All the marked videos display in time order.</li>
<li>To modify the name of marked video, double-click a marked video, the <strong>Edit Mark </strong>dialog box is displayed.</li>
<li>To delete the marked video, select the marked video, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>After opening the <strong>Manger </strong>interface, the playback will pause until exiting this interface. If the marked video that was in playing back is deleted, the playback will start from the first marked video in the <strong>Mark List</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark434"></a> Playing Back Snapshots</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search and play back the snapshots.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Search Type </strong>list, select <strong>PIC</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel number.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Calendar </strong>area, select a date.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>13.</strong></p>
<p>The system starts playing snapshots according to the configured intervals.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark436"></a> Playing Back Splices</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save your time.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Search Type </strong>list, select <strong>Splice Playback</strong>; In the Split Mode list, select <strong>4</strong>, <strong>9</strong>, or</p>
<p><strong>16</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark438"> Figure 5-103.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="298" height="215" class="wp-image-2211" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-173.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 173" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 532"></p>
<p>Figure 5-103</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark438"></a> Step 3 In the <strong>Calendar </strong>area, select a date.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>CAM NAME </strong>list, select a channel.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>Only single-channel supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 5 Start playing back splices. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark439"> Figure 5-104.</a></p>
<p>• Click □, the playback starts from the beginning.</p>
<p>• Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="52" class="wp-image-2212" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 174" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 533" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-300x19.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-768x48.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-174-810x51.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-104</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark439"></a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Every recorded video file must be at least five minutes. If a recorded video file is less than 20 minutes but still choose to split into four windows, the system will automatically adjust the windows quantity to ensure every splice is more than five minutes, and in this case it is possible that there are no images are displaying in some windows.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark440"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark441"></a> 5.9.8 Using the File List</p>
<p>You can view all the recorded videos within a certain period from any channel in the <strong>File List</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Video</strong>, the video search interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select a channel(s).</p>
<p>Step 3</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="36" class="wp-image-2213" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-175.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 175" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 534"></p>
<p>The <strong>File List </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark443"> Figure 5-105.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="254" height="888" class="wp-image-2214" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 176" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 535" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176.jpeg 254w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-176-86x300.jpeg 86w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 254px) 100vw, 254px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-105</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark443"></a> Step 4 Start playback.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click , the playback starts from the first file by default.</li>
<li>Click any file, the system plays back this file.</li>
</ul>
<p>Q2 NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>In the time box on the top of the file list interface, you can enter the specific time to search the file that you want to view.</li>
<li>In the File List area, there are 128 files can be displayed.</li>
<li>File type: <strong>R </strong>indicates general recorded video; <strong>A </strong>indicates recorded video with external alarms; <strong>M </strong>indicates recorded video with motion detection events; <strong>I </strong>indicates recorded video with intelligent vents.</li>
<li>Click a to return to the interface with calendar and CAM NAME list.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark444"></a> Locking and Unlocking the Recorded Video</p>
<ul>
<li>To lock the recorded video, in the <strong>File List </strong>interface, select the check box of the recorded</li>
</ul>
<p>video, and then click LU. The locked video will not be covered.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>To view the locked information, click</p>
<p>, the <strong>FILE LOCKED </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.</p>
<ul>
<li>To unlock the recorded video, in the <strong>FILE LOCKED </strong>interface, select the video, and then click Unlock. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark446"> Figure 5-106.</a></li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark446"></a> Figure 5-106</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark447"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark448"></a> 5.10 Alarm Events Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="908" height="512" class="wp-image-2215" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 177" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 536" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177.jpeg 908w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-177-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 908px) 100vw, 908px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark450"></a> Video Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark452"></a> Video detection adopts computer vision and image processing technology. The technology analyzes the video images to detect the obvious changes such as moving objects and blurriness. The system activates alarms when such changes are detected.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark453"></a> Configuring Motion Detect Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the moving object appears, and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the system activates the alarm.</p>
<p>To configure the motion, detect settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Events VIDIEO DETECT &gt; Motion Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark455"> Figure 5-107.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="459" class="wp-image-2216" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 178" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 537" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-178-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-107</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark455"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark456"> Table 5-34.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to set the motion detection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Region</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to define the motion detection region.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable MD</td>
<td>Enable or disable the motion detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable PIR</td>
<td>PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves, flies. The detection range by PIR is smaller than the field angle.</p>
<p>PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect.</p>
<p>£D NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only when the channel type is CVI, the PIR function can be</li>
</ul>
<p>enabled.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the camera does not support PIR function, it will be</li>
</ul>
<p>unusable.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the Device does not support PIR function, it will not be</li>
</ul>
<p>displayed on the interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the motion detection is active.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for motion detection and auto recording function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu ^ Display <em>■+</em> Tour</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="7">Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td colspan="2">configured:</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule &gt; Snapshot</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Mode </strong>list,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in <strong>Main Menu</strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>Tour</strong>.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">Not all models support this function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="7">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark456"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="7">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-34</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Test </strong>to test the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Setting the Motion Detection Region</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Region</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The region setting screen is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 2 Point to the middle top of the interface.</p>
<p>The setting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark457"> Figure 5-108.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="526" height="205" class="wp-image-2217" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 179" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 538" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179.jpeg 526w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-179-300x117.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 526px) 100vw, 526px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-108</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark457"></a> Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.</p>
<ol>
<li>Select one region, for example, click .</li>
<li>Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.</li>
</ol>
<p>The selected area shows the color that represents the region.</p>
<p>3) Configure the parameters.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter a name for the region.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sensitivity</td>
<td>Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value. The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Threshold</td>
<td>Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every channel has an individual threshold.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-109</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.</p>
<p>Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting interface.</p>
<p>Step 5 On the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><strong>Setting Motion Detection Period</strong></p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Period</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark458"> Figure 5-110.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="471" class="wp-image-2218" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 180" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 539" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-768x438.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-180-810x462.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-110</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark458"></a> Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.</p>
<ul>
<li>Define the period by drawing.</li>
</ul>
<p>O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.</p>
<p>O Define for several days of a week: Click ^9 before each day, the icon</p>
<p>switches to a. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days with a will take the same settings.</p>
<p>O Define for all days of a week: Click <strong>All</strong>, all e switches to E3. On the</p>
<p>timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</li>
</ul>
<p>1) Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="39" class="wp-image-2219" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-181.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 181" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 540"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark459"> Figure 5-111.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="815" height="457" class="wp-image-2220" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 182" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 541" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182.jpeg 815w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-182-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 815px) 100vw, 815px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-111</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark459"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 On the <strong>Motion Detect </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark460"></a> 5.10.1.2 Configuring Video Loss Settings</p>
<p>When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm. To configure the Video loss settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT <em>■&gt;</em> Video Loss</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Video Loss </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark462"> Figure 5-112.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="458" class="wp-image-2221" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 183" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 542" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-183-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-112</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark462"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">“5.10.1.1</a> Co<a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">nfiguring Motion Detect Settings.</a>”</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark463"></a> 5.10.1.3 Configuring Tampering Settings</p>
<p>When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of the causes such as sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you can configure the tampering alarm settings.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT ^ Tampering</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Tampering </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark465"> Figure 5-113.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="799" height="448" class="wp-image-2222" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 184" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 543" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184.jpeg 799w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-184-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 799px) 100vw, 799px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-113</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark465"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">“5.10.1.1</a> Co<a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">nfiguring Motion Detect Settings.</a>”</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark466"></a> 5.10.1.4 Configuring Diagnosis Settings</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>This function can be used only when it is supported by the camera.</p>
<p>When the video appear the conditions such as blurry, overexposed, or the color changes, the system activates the alarm.</p>
<p>To configure the diagnosis settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Events VIDIEO DETECT &gt; Diagnosis</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark468"> Figure 5-114.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="423" class="wp-image-2223" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 185" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 544" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185.jpeg 750w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-185-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-114</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark468"></a> Step 2 To configure the settings for the diagnosis parameters, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<p><strong>Setting the Types for Diagnosing Targets</strong></p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Rule</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark469"> Figure 5-115.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="374" class="wp-image-2224" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 186" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 545" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186.jpeg 528w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-186-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-115</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark469"></a> Step 2 Select the items that you want to diagnose and set the threshold (30 by default). See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark470">Table 5-35.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stripe</td>
<td>A horizontal, vertical or diagonal stripe that might appear in the video because of device aging or electronic interruption. Such stripe brings visual interruption.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Noise</td>
<td>Video noises such as blurriness or quality reduction that is caused by optical distortion or device problem during camera shooting.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Color Cast</td>
<td>Variances in the normal proportions of RGB colors.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Out of Focus</td>
<td>Blurry video is caused during camera shooting, transferring and processing. Such condition is a common image quality reduction problem and defined as out of focus.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Overexposure</td>
<td>The video brightness refers to the intensity of image pixel. The range is between 0 (the darkest black) and 255 (the brightest white). If the brightness exceeds the threshold, the image is over exposed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark470"></a> Threshold</td>
<td>The range is from 1 through 100. If the value after diagnosing is higher than what you set, the system activates the alarm to the corresponding diagnosing types such as stripe.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-35</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>The system returns to the <strong>Diagnosis </strong>interface.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark471"></a> 5.10.2 Intelligent Function</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="907" height="510" class="wp-image-2225" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 187" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 546" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187.jpeg 907w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-187-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 907px) 100vw, 907px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2226" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-188.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 188" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 547"></p>
<p>Please disable IP channels function first before using IVS function.</p>
<p>IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>INTELL SETTING </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark473"> Figure 5-116.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="739" height="418" class="wp-image-2227" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 189" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 548" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189.jpeg 739w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-189-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 739px) 100vw, 739px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-116</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark473"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel number that you want to configure the IVS function for.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>One line of rule is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark474"> Figure 5-117.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="739" height="418" class="wp-image-2228" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 190" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 549" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190.jpeg 739w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-190-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 739px) 100vw, 739px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-117</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark474"></a> Step 4 Configure the parameters for the rule that you selected.</p>
<p>Step 5 Select the check box of the rule to enable it.</p>
<p>Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark475"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark476"></a> Configuring Tripwire Rules</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>The tripwire can be configured as a straight line or broken line.</li>
<li>Supports detecting one-way or two-way tripwire crossing.</li>
<li>Supports multiple tripwires in the same scenario to meet the complexity.</li>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Tripwire</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark478"> Figure 5-118.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="405" class="wp-image-2229" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 191" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 550" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-191-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-118</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark478"></a> Step 2 Draw a tripwire.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
<li>Click □.</li>
</ol>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the tripwire rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark479"> Figure 5­119.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="760" height="563" class="wp-image-2230" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 192" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 551" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192.jpeg 760w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-192-300x222.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 760px) 100vw, 760px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-119</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark480"> Table 5-36.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark479"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="3">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Direction</td>
<td colspan="3">Set the direction of the tripwire. You can choose <strong>A to B </strong>(left to right), <strong>B to A </strong>(right to left), and <strong>Both</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Filtering Target</td>
<td>Click</td>
<td></td>
<td>to draw areas to filter the target.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-36</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark480"></a> Drag to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a straight line, broken line or polygon.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2231" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-193.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 193" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 552"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered.</p>
<p>The <strong>Trigger </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark481"> Figure 5-120.</a></p>
<p>Trigger</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Period</p>
<p>Alarm Out</p>
<p>Show Message</p>
<p>Record Channel</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td rowspan="3">Latch</p>
<p>Send Email</td>
<td rowspan="3">10</td>
<td rowspan="3">Sec.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Setting</p>
<p>Alarm Upload</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>10</td>
<td>Sec.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td></td>
<td>Log</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>None</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>OK Back</p>
<p>Figure 5-120</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark481"></a> Step 4 Configure the triggering parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark482"> Table 5-37.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display set interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period” section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu ^ Display^ Tour</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule <em>■+</em> Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu ^Camera ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the <strong>Mode </strong>list,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tour</strong>.&#8221;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark482"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="2">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-37</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>INTELL SETTING </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 6 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The tripwire detecting function is active. When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark483"></a> 5.10.2.2 Configuring Intrusion Rules</p>
<p>When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Supports detecting the behaviors that enter and leave the intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Supports detecting the behaviors that are moving in the intrusion areas. The quantity of</li>
</ul>
<p>areas and lasting time can be configured.</p>
<ul>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Intrusion</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark485"> Figure 5-121.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="460" class="wp-image-2232" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 194" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 553" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194.jpeg 816w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-194-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 816px) 100vw, 816px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-121</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark485"></a> Step 2 Draw a tripwire.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
<li>Click □.</li>
</ol>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the intrusion rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark486"> Figure 5­122.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="705" height="545" class="wp-image-2233" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 195" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 554" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195.jpeg 705w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-195-300x232.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 705px) 100vw, 705px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-122</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark487"> Table 5-3</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark480">8Table</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark480">5-36.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark486"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="2">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Action</td>
<td colspan="5">Configure the actions that are defined as intrusion. You can select the <strong>Appear </strong>check box and the <strong>Cross-check </strong>box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Direction</td>
<td colspan="5">In the <strong>Direction </strong>list, select the direction of crossing the configured area. You can select <strong>Enter&amp;Exit</strong>, <strong>Enters</strong>, and <strong>Exits</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Click ^3 to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark487"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-38</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2234" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-196.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 196" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 555"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The intrusion detecting function is active. When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark488"></a> 5.10.2.3 Configuring Abandoned Rules</p>
<p>When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.</li>
<li>Period value can be configured.</li>
<li>Supports size filtering for target.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Abandoned</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Abandoned </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark490"> Figure 5-123.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="760" height="429" class="wp-image-2235" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 197" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 556" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197.jpeg 760w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-197-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 760px) 100vw, 760px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-123</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark490"></a> Step 2 Draw an area.</p>
<ol>
<li>In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</li>
</ol>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="50" height="47" class="wp-image-2236" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-198.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 198" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 557"></p>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the abandoned rules is displayed. See Figure 5-124.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="621" height="494" class="wp-image-2237" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 199" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 558" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199.jpeg 621w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-199-300x239.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 621px) 100vw, 621px" /></p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark491"> Table 5-39.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized rule name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the abandoned objects.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click fad to draw areas to filter the target</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark491"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td>You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-39</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2238" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-200.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 200" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 559"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The abandoned object detecting function is active. When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark492"></a> 5.10.2.4 Configuring Missing Rules</p>
<p>When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Missing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Missing </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark494"> Figure 5-125.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="757" height="425" class="wp-image-2239" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 201" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 560" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201.jpeg 757w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-201-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 757px) 100vw, 757px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-125</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark494"></a> Step 2 Draw an area.</p>
<p>1) In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.</p>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="48" height="41" class="wp-image-2240" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-202.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 202" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 561"></p>
<p>The monitoring screen to configure the missing rules is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark495"> Figure 5­126.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="571" class="wp-image-2241" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 203" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 562" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-203-300x238.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-126</p>
<p>3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark496"> Table 5-40.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark495"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td colspan="2">Enter the customized rule name.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td colspan="3">Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the missing objects.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Click to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark496"></a> Filtering Target</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-40</p>
<ol>
<li>Drag to draw an area.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2242" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-204.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 204" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 563"></p>
<p>to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">&#8220;5.10.2.1 Configuring</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark475">Tripwire Rules.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</p>
<p>The missing object detecting function is active. When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark497"></a> Face Detection</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the face detection settings and search the detected faces in the defined time period.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark499"></a> Configuring Face Detection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device detects the human faces, the system activates alarms.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Not all models support this function.</li>
<li>Smart IPC must be equipped with face detect function.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Human Face </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark501"> Figure 5-127.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="803" height="452" class="wp-image-2243" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 205" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 564" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205.jpeg 803w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-205-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 803px) 100vw, 803px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2244" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-206.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 206" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 565"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark501"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the face detection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark502"> Table 5-41.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel to set the face detection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to draw areas to filter the target.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Target Filter</td>
<td colspan="2">You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum size</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="3">or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be activated. The</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>maximum size should be larger than the minimum size.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the face detection function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td colspan="2">Define a period during which the motion detection is active.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Enable alarm activation function. Select the alarm output port(s) to which the peripheral alarm devices are connected. When an alarm event occurs, the system activates the peripheral alarm devices connected to the selected output port.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td colspan="10">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td colspan="10">Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4"><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td colspan="8">Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="9">The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8"><a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8216;</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td colspan="9">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td colspan="10">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="10">Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="7">To use this function, make sure the following settings are</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td colspan="2">configured:</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="8">The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5"><strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="8">Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">the <strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="8">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="10">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark502"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="9">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a human face detection event.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-41</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark503"></a> Searching for Detected Faces</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^Video^ Intelligent Play^ Smart Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SMART SEARCH </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark505"> Figure 5-128.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="782" height="439" class="wp-image-2245" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 207" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 566" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207.jpeg 782w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-207-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 782px) 100vw, 782px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-128</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark505"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Begin Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The faces searched in the defined period display. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark506"> Figure 5-129.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="820" height="465" class="wp-image-2246" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 208" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 567" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208.jpeg 820w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-208-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 820px) 100vw, 820px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-129</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark506"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark507"></a> System Events</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm output for three types of system event (HDD, Network, and User). When there is an abnormal system event occurs, the system activates alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark509"></a> Configuring HDD Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Events Abnormity &gt; HDD</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>HDD </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark511"> Figure 5-130.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="873" height="486" class="wp-image-2247" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 209" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 568" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209.jpeg 873w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-768x428.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-209-810x451.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 873px) 100vw, 873px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-130</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the HDD event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark512"> Table 5-42.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark511"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>No HDD</strong>, <strong>HDD Error</strong>, or <strong>HDD No Space </strong>as the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the HDD event detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ NETWORK ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark512"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a HDD alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-42</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark513"></a> Configuring Network Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ Abnormity ^ Network</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark515"> Figure 5-131.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="831" height="467" class="wp-image-2248" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 210" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 569" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210.jpeg 831w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-210-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 831px) 100vw, 831px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-131</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the Network event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark516"> Table 5-43.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark515"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>Net Disconnection</strong>, <strong>IP Conflicted</strong>, or <strong>MAC Conflicted </strong>as the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the Network event detection function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark516"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a network alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-43</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark517"></a> Configuring User Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ Abnormity ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>User </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark519"> Figure 5-132.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="804" height="451" class="wp-image-2249" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 211" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 570" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211.jpeg 804w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-211-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 804px) 100vw, 804px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-132</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the User event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark520"> Table 5-44.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark519"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>Illegal Login</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the user error detection function.</p>
<p>If you do not enable this function, there will be no limit for wrong password entry and the account cannot be locked because of the wrong password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Attempt(s)</td>
<td>Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Lock Time</td>
<td>Set how long the account is locked for. The value ranges from 1 minute to 60 minutes.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>1&#8217;H NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ Email</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark520"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a user account alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-44</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark521"></a> Configuring Device Event Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Event ^ Abnormity &gt; Device</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Device </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark523"> Figure 5-133.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="732" height="586" class="wp-image-2250" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 212" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 571" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212.jpeg 732w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-212-300x240.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 732px) 100vw, 732px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-133</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the device event. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark524"> Table 5-45.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark523"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Event Type </strong>list, select <strong>High Temperature </strong>or <strong>Fan Speed Abnormal</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Name</td>
<td>Enter the name for the event type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the device event detection function.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="3"><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Max Temperature</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Max Temperature </strong>box, enter the max temperature value.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td colspan="3">Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td colspan="2">Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td colspan="3">Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td colspan="3">Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark524"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td colspan="3">Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a Device alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-45</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark525"></a> Alarm Input Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Connect the alarm input and output ports by referring to <a href="#post-2037-bookmark67">&#8220;4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark67">Output.</a>&#8221; You can configure the alarm settings for each channel individually or apply the settings to all channels and then save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark527"></a> Configuring Local Alarms</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the alarm device to the alarm input port of the Device. When the alarm is activated on the alarm device, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the local alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Events ALARM INPUT <em>■&gt;</em> Local</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Local </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark529"> Figure 5-134.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="677" height="542" class="wp-image-2251" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 213" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 572" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213.jpeg 677w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-213-300x240.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 677px) 100vw, 677px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-134</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the local alarms. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark529"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></p>
<p><strong>Description</strong></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Alarm In</td>
<td>Select the channel number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized alarm name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable or disable the local alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>NO </strong>or select <strong>NC </strong>as the voltage output type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period&#8221; section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Show Message</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Upload</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Send Email </strong>check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Send Email</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Snapshot</td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Video Matrix</td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Display <em>■+</em> TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>EQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Not all models support this function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Buzzer</td>
<td>Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Log</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark530"></a> Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-46</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy</strong>, in the <strong>Copy </strong>dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the local alarm settings to, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark531"></a> Configuring Alarms from Alarm Box</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the alarm box to the RS485 port of the Device. When the alarm is detected by the alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the alarms in the way that you configure in this section.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event^ALARM INPUT ^ Alarm Box</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Alarm Box </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark533"> Figure 5-135</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="748" height="420" class="wp-image-2252" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 214" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 573" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214.jpeg 748w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-214-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 748px) 100vw, 748px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2253" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-215.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 215" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 574"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark533"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Alarm Box </strong>list, select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Alarm In </strong>list, select the alarm input port on the Alarm Box.</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5­46.</a></p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark534"></a> Configuring Alarms from External IP Cameras</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Events ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Ext</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IPC Ext </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark536"> Figure 5-136.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="759" height="425" class="wp-image-2254" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 216" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 575" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216.jpeg 759w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-216-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 759px) 100vw, 759px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-136</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark536"></a> Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2255" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-217.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 217" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 576"></p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh configured settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark537"></a> 5.10.5.4 Configuring Alarms for IP Camera Offline</p>
<p>You can configure the alarm settings for the situation when the IP camera is offline.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Event ^ ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Offline</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IPC Offline </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark539"> Figure 5-137.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="749" height="421" class="wp-image-2256" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 218" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 577" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218.jpeg 749w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-218-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 749px) 100vw, 749px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2257" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-219.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 219" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 578"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark539"></a> Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5-46.</a></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>Default </strong>to restore the default setting.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark540"></a> 5.10.5.5 Configuring Alarms from External Devices</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^Event^ ALARM INPUT ^ HDCVI Alarm</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Ext. Alarm </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark542"> Figure 5-138.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="793" height="445" class="wp-image-2258" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 220" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 579" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220.jpeg 793w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-220-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 793px) 100vw, 793px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-138</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark542"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select a channel or <strong>all</strong>.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="38" class="wp-image-2259" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-221.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 221" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 580"></p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark543"> Figure 5-139.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="778" height="464" class="wp-image-2260" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 222" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 581" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222.jpeg 778w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222-300x179.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-222-768x458.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 778px) 100vw, 778px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-139</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark543"></a> Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark530"> Table 5­46.</a></p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark544"></a> 5.10.6 Alarm Output Settings</p>
<p>When the Device activates alarms, the connected alarm device generates alarms in the way that you can configure in this section. You can connect to the output port of the Device or connect wirelessly.</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: When an alarm event is triggered on the Device, the connected alarm device generates alarms.</li>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: The alarm device is forced to keep generating alarms.</li>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: The alarm output function is not enabled.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu^ Event ^ ALARM OUTPUT.</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>ALARM OUTPUT </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark546"> Figure 5-140.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="719" height="405" class="wp-image-2261" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 223" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 582" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223.jpeg 719w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-223-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 719px) 100vw, 719px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-140</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm output. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark547"> Table 5-47</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">.Table 5-46</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark546"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">General Alarm</td>
<td>Alarm Type</td>
<td>Select alarm type for each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="3">Ext. Alarm</td>
<td>Alarm Box</td>
<td>Select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Type</td>
<td>Select the alarm type for each alarm output ports.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of each alarm output port.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2"><a id="post-2037-bookmark547"></a> Alarm Release</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK to </strong>clear all alarm output status.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-47</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark548"></a> 5.11 IoT Function</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark550"></a> Configuring Sensor Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect external sensors wirelessly through the Device with USB gateway or through connecting to a camera gateway. After connection, you can activate alarm events through external sensors.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark552"></a> Connecting Sensor through Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Only the Device with USB gateway supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^Manager ^ Sensor Pairing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Sensor Pairing </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark554"> Figure 5-141.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2262" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 224" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 583" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-224-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-141</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark554"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>USB Gateway</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark555"> Figure 5-142.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="482" class="wp-image-2263" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 225" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 584" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-225-300x245.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-142</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark555"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Pair</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts pairing with the sensor.</p>
<p>After pairing is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark556"> Figure 5-143.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="482" class="wp-image-2264" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 226" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 585" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-226-300x245.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-143</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark556"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>Back </strong>to exit the pairing interface.</p>
<p>The added sensor information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark557"> Figure 5-144.</a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="43" class="wp-image-2265" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-227.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 227" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 586"></p>
<p>to modify the sensor name; click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="47" height="45" class="wp-image-2266" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-228.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 228" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 587"></p>
<p>to delete sensor information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2267" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 229" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 588" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-229-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-144</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark557"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark558"></a> Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Only the camera with gateway supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Sensor Pairing</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Sensor Pairing </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark560"> Figure 5-145.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2268" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 230" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 589" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-230-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-145</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark560"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>Camera Gateway</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Channel </strong>list, select the channel that is connected to the camera.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark561"> Figure 5-146.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="486" class="wp-image-2269" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 231" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 590" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-231-300x247.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-146</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark561"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>Pair</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts pairing with the sensor.</p>
<p>After pairing is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark562"> Figure 5-147.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="484" class="wp-image-2270" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 232" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 591" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-232-300x246.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-147</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark562"></a> Step 6 Click <strong>Back </strong>to exit the pairing interface.</p>
<p>The added sensor information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark563"> Figure 5-148.</a> Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="43" class="wp-image-2271" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-233.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 233" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 592"></p>
<p>to modify the sensor name; click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="47" height="45" class="wp-image-2272" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-234.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 234" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 593"></p>
<p>to delete sensor information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="781" height="440" class="wp-image-2273" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 235" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 594" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235.jpeg 781w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-235-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 781px) 100vw, 781px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-148</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark563"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark564"></a> 5.11.1.3 Configuring Alarm Linkage</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Wireless Detector</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wireless Detector </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark566"> Figure 5-149.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="614" class="wp-image-2274" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 236" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 595" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-300x221.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-768x565.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-236-810x596.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark566"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Access Type </strong>list, select <strong>USB</strong>, <strong>Camera</strong>, or <strong>All</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2275" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-237.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 237" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 596"></p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark543"> Figure 5-139.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="765" height="454" class="wp-image-2276" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 238" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 597" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238.jpeg 765w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-238-300x178.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 765px) 100vw, 765px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-150</p>
<p>Step 4 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark567"> Table 5-48.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Enter the customized alarm name.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see &#8220;Setting Motion Detection Period&#8221; section in <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Configuring Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface.</p>
<p>Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected</li>
</ul>
<p>alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Record Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>Select the <strong>Snapshot </strong>check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Snapshot</td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>• Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>, in the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Mode </strong>list, select <strong>Event</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the <strong>Tour </strong>check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. nn. note</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to enable a</li>
</ul>
<p>pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function. When</li>
</ul>
<p>an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification when</p>
<p>an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in <strong>Main</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local</p>
<p>alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-48</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark567"></a> Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Step 6 On the <strong>Wireless Detector </strong>interface, click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark568"></a> Configuring Temperature and Humidity Camera</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view, search and export the temperature and humidity data of camera with such sensors and configure the alarm event settings.</p>
<p>To use this function, please make sure there is at least one camera with temperature and humidity sensor has been connected to the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark570"></a> Enabling Detecting Function</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You should enable the IoT function the first time when you enter this interface.</p>
<p>Step <strong>1 </strong>On the main menu^Intelligent, click <strong>loT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark572"> Figure 5-151.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="928" height="636" class="wp-image-2277" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 239" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 598" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239.jpeg 928w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-768x526.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-810x555.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-239-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 928px) 100vw, 928px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-151</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark572"></a> Step 2 Select the <strong>Enable </strong>check boxes to enable IoT function. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark573"> Figure 5-152.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<p>Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>l?Pi</td>
<td>Detect PosOon Nam</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td>a</td>
<td>Ch»6</td>
<td>Ternipaatiire</td>
<td>Chn6 Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Sçnjçr Piiirmg</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="551" height="24" class="wp-image-2278" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 240" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 599" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240.jpeg 551w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-240-300x13.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 551px) 100vw, 551px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-152</p>
<p>The Device starts detecting the temperature and humidity data from the camera and display on the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark573"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark574"></a> Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the temperature and humidity data on the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface after the IoT function is enabled.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Refresh Interval </strong>box, select data refresh interval. For example, you can select <strong>5 Sec</strong>.</p>
<p>You can also display the temperature and humidity data in graphical way by selecting the <strong>Display Graph </strong>check box to. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark576"> Figure 5-153 </a>for humidity data in graphical way.</p>
<p>&gt; REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>MANAGER</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>r+eh&#8217;«fi interval</td>
<td>5Sk</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>tiifXay Gras*</td>
<td>Accth Rani dm 6</td>
<td>tn*</p>
<p>Trtfnpcf dlijf f</td>
<td>Oawcr Roa bon Na*ii Chnfi-lenipcf alurc-1</td>
<td>Curr enl Vai u are</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>dify</td>
<td>Ghnfrltaiirftï 1</td>
<td>* m</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Témçièr Mui fr Ciiarl Humdiity Chart</p>
<p>&lt;kRH|</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="141" height="165" class="wp-image-2279" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-241.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 241" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 600"></p>
<p>C*e»f</p>
<p>Figure 5-153</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2280" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-242.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 242" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 601"></p>
<p>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to delete the data.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark576"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark577"></a> Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export the temperature and humidity data in .BMP format. Take exporting humidity data as an example.</p>
<p>Step 1 Prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 On the <strong>Realtime Display </strong>interface, click the <strong>Humidity </strong>tab. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark579"> Figure 5-154</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="607" class="wp-image-2281" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 243" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 602" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243-300x231.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-243-768x592.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-154</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark579"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Locked </strong>to lock the data.</p>
<p>The export button is enabled.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Export</strong>. The system starts exporting the data.</p>
<p>After exporting is finished, a <strong>Message </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>You can find the exported data on your USB device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark580"></a> Configuring Alarm Linkage</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure alarm linkage settings for temperature and humidity data.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><strong>Configuring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data</strong></li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity</strong>. The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark582"> Figure 5-155.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<p>Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>2</td>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Setting</td>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>W</td>
<td>Delect Position Nam</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td>a</td>
<td>Ch»6</td>
<td>Tern ¡para Cure</td>
<td>Chn6 Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Sçnjçr Pairing</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="551" height="24" class="wp-image-2282" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 244" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 603" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244.jpeg 551w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-244-300x13.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 551px) 100vw, 551px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-155</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="39" class="wp-image-2283" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-245.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 245" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 604"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark582"></a> Step 2 On the temperature information line, click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark583"> Figure 5-156.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="752" height="479" class="wp-image-2284" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 246" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 605" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246.jpeg 752w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-246-300x191.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-156</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark583"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark584"> Table 5-49.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td><strong>Temperature </strong>by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Detect Position</p>
<p>Name</td>
<td>Set the detect position name.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Select event type as <strong>High </strong>or <strong>Low</strong>, and set the upper and low temperature limit respectively. For example, select event type as <strong>High </strong>and set upper limit as <strong>28</strong>, the alarm occurs when the temperature reaches 28 (&#8216;.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Upper Limit</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE</p>
<p>To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+</em> Schedule <em>■+ </em>Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display <em>•+</em> TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to</li>
</ul>
<p>enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function.</li>
</ul>
<p>When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification</p>
<p>when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a</p>
<p>local alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-49</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark584"></a><strong>Configuring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data</strong></li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm event by setting the humidity data.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT <em>■+</em> Manager </strong>^ <strong>Temperature/Humidity</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Temperature/Humidity </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark585"> Figure 5-157.</a></p>
<p>REALTIME DISPLAY</p>
<p>SEARCH INFO</p>
<p>&gt; MANAGER</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Senser Pairing</td>
<td colspan="2">Tempratu rcAI u_</td>
<td>Wirde» Detector</td>
<td>Wir el ess Siren</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="6"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>2 1</td>
<td>E natte</p>
<p>s</td>
<td>Sating</p>
<p>&lt;5</td>
<td>Accession!</p>
<p>Chn6</td>
<td>Temperature</td>
<td>Deled Position Nam Chn6-Temperature</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="511" height="20" class="wp-image-2285" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 247" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 606" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247.jpeg 511w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-247-300x12.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 511px) 100vw, 511px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-157</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="45" height="38" class="wp-image-2286" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-248.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 248" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 607"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark585"></a> Step 2 On the humidity information line, click</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark586"> Figure 5-158.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="830" height="526" class="wp-image-2287" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 249" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 608" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249.jpeg 830w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-300x190.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-768x487.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-249-810x513.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 830px) 100vw, 830px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-158</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark586"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the following parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark587"> Table 5-50.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td><strong>Humidity </strong>by default.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Detect Position</p>
<p>Name</td>
<td>Set the detect position name.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Preview Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Event Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Select event type as <strong>High Humidity </strong>or <strong>Low Humidity</strong>, and set the upper and low humidity limit respectively. For example, select event type as <strong>High Humidity </strong>and set upper limit as <strong>60</strong>, the alarm occurs when the humidity reaches 60%RH.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Upper Limit</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">&#8220;5.10.1.1 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark452">Motion Detect Settings.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Alarm Out</td>
<td>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display setting interface.</p>
<ul>
<li>General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm</li>
</ul>
<p>devices connected to the selected output port.</p>
<ul>
<li>External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the</li>
</ul>
<p>connected alarm box.</p>
<ul>
<li>Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices</li>
</ul>
<p>connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PTZ</td>
<td>Enable PTZ activation function.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Latch</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Post Record</td>
<td>Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anti-Dither</td>
<td>Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Snapshot</td>
<td>Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE</p>
<p>To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage <em>■+</em> Schedule <em>■+ </em>Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">Tour</td>
<td>Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>in <strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display <em>•+</em> TOUR</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Voice Prompts</td>
<td>Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">More Setting</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>Show Message: Select the <strong>Show Message </strong>check box to</li>
</ul>
<p>enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.</p>
<ul>
<li>Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function.</li>
</ul>
<p>When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in &#8220;<strong>Main Menu </strong>^ <strong>Display </strong>^ <strong>TOUR</strong>.&#8221;</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>• Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification</p>
<p>when an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>CP NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>•+</em> EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>• Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a</p>
<p>local alarm log</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-50</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark587"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark588"></a> Searching IoT Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can search and backup all your IoT data.</p>
<p>To back up the data, you should prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click <strong>IoT ^ SEARCH INFO</strong>. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark590"> Figure 5-159.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="796" height="610" class="wp-image-2288" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 250" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 609" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250.jpeg 796w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250-300x230.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-250-768x589.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 796px) 100vw, 796px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-159</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark590"></a> Step 2 Configure the parameters settings. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark591"> Table 5-51.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Access Point</td>
<td>Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Display Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Display Type </strong>list, select <strong>List </strong>or <strong>Graph</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Select the information type that you want to search. You can select</p>
<p><strong>Humidity </strong>or <strong>Temperature</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Select the information state that you want to search.</p>
<p>This option is available when you select <strong>List </strong>in the <strong>Display Type </strong>list.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark591"></a> End Time</td>
<td>Enter the start time and end time for the information that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-51</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search</strong>. The system starts search according to your parameters settings.</p>
<p>After searching is finished, the result displays.</p>
<ul>
<li>For the data displayed in list, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark592"> Figure 5-160.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Go To </strong>to switch result pages.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>UM</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>All</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>M</em></strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>wtTwne</strong></td>
<td><strong>2017 11 06</strong></td>
<td><strong>00:0000 E</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2017-12-06 00 00 00</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Search</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>120</strong></td>
<td><strong>lime</strong></td>
<td><strong>Accew Pant</strong></td>
<td><strong>Type</strong></td>
<td><strong>Detect Paaton Name •</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>MI-0721 13 58</strong></td>
<td><strong>Ovi t</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Ctmt liznwStv 1</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>*</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>4 201</strong></td>
<td><strong><em>1</em> 1147 21 14 00</strong></p>
<p><strong>M147 71 14 09</strong></p>
<p><strong>MI-0721 14 10 Mt 47 21 14 14 Mi-07 21 14 23 F It 0721 1004</strong></p>
<p><strong><em>1</em> 11 07 21.16 07</strong></p>
<p><strong>MI-0721 10 17 Ml 47 21 16 26 MI-07 21 16 77 1-1147 21 16 36</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Kim*aty</strong></td>
<td><strong>•</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>1/</strong></td>
<td><strong>85 &gt; » 1</strong></td>
<td><strong>Go To</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Backup</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-160</p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark592"></a> For the data displayed in graph, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark593"> Figure 5-161.</a></li>
</ul>
<p>&gt; SEARCI</p>
<p>Humodit/</p>
<p>Stall Ti</p>
<p>2017-11-06 00:00.00&#8242;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="293" height="120" class="wp-image-2289" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-251.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 251" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 610"></p>
<p>Ml</p>
<p>Cbnl HuMiny 1</p>
<p>Figure 5-161</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark593"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Backup. </strong>The system starts exporting the data.</p>
<p>After exporting is finished, a <strong>Message </strong>dialog box is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p>You can find the exported data on your USB device.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark594"></a> 5.11.3 Configuring Wireless Siren</p>
<p>You can connect the wireless siren to the Device, when there is an alarm event activated on the Device, the wireless siren generates alarms.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Intelligent ^ IoT &gt; Manager &gt; Wireless Siren</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wireless Siren </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark596"> Figure 5-16</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark546">2Figure 5-140.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="765" height="590" class="wp-image-2290" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 252" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 611" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252.jpeg 765w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-252-300x231.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 765px) 100vw, 765px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-162</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark596"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the wireless alarm output. For details, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark597"> Table 5-52</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">.Table</a></p>
<p><a href="#post-2037-bookmark530">5-46</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>USB Gateway, Camera Gateway</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li><strong>Auto</strong>: Automatically activate alarm if the alarm output function</li>
</ul>
<p>for wireless siren is enabled for specific events. For example, if you want to enable the alarm output through wireless siren for motion detection, see &#8220;Alarm Output&#8221; parameter in<a href="#post-2037-bookmark456"> Table 5­34.</a></p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Manual</strong>: Activate alarm immediately.</li>
<li><strong>Stop</strong>: Do not activate alarm.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark597"></a> Alarm Release</td>
<td>Click <strong>OK to </strong>clear all alarm output status of wireless siren.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-52</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark598"></a> Configuring POS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it. This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel window.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view screen only support single-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark600"></a> Searching the Transaction Records</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Intelligent <em>•+</em> POS ^ POS SEARCH</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>POS SEARCH </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark602"> Figure 5-163.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="459" class="wp-image-2291" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 253" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 612" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-253-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-163</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark602"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Transaction No. </strong>list, enter the transaction number on your receipt printed out by POS machine.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time period that you want to search the POS transaction information.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The searched transaction results display in the table.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark603"></a> Configuring POS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Intelligent^ POS ^ POS SETUP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>POS SETUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark605"> Figure 5-164.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="805" height="452" class="wp-image-2292" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 254" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 613" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254.jpeg 805w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-254-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 805px) 100vw, 805px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-164</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark605"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark606"> Table 5-53.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>POS Name </strong>list, select the POS machine that you want to configure settings for. Click ^3 to modify the POS name. CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English characters.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the POS function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>The recording for POS alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark389">&#8220;5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.</a>&#8220;</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Privacy Setup</td>
<td>Enter the privacy content.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol Type</td>
<td>Select <strong>POS </strong>by default. Different machine corresponds to different protocol.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Connect Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Connect Type </strong>list, select the connection protocol type.</p>
<p>Click <strong>^3, </strong>the IP Address interface is displayed.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Source IP </strong>box, enter the IP address (the machine that is connected to the Device) that sends messages.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Convert</td>
<td>Select a character encoding mode.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Overlay</td>
<td>In the <strong>Overlay </strong>list, Select <strong>Turn </strong>or <strong>ROLL</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Network time out</td>
<td>When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the latest POS information will be displayed.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Time Display</td>
<td>Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Font Size</td>
<td>In the Font Size list, select <strong>Small</strong>, <strong>Medium</strong>, or <strong>Big </strong>as the text size of POS information</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>COLOR</td>
<td>In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Info</td>
<td>Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live view screen.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transaction Start</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the transaction start character and end character.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Transaction End</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark606"></a> Line Delimiter</td>
<td>Enter the line delimiter that you want to use.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-53</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark607"></a> Configuring Backup Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="470" class="wp-image-2293" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 255" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 614" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-255-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark609"></a> Finding USB Device</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you inset a USB storage device into the USB port of the Device, the Device detects the USB storage device and pops up &#8220;Find USB device&#8221; interface, which provides you a shortcut to perform backup and upgrading operations. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark612"> Figure 5-165.</a></p>
<p>For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark611">&#8220;5.13.2 Backing up Files&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark847">&#8220;5.19.2 Viewing Log Information&#8221;</a>, <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">&#8220;5.18.5 Exporting</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark818">and Importing System Settings&#8221;</a>, and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark831">&#8220;5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="601" height="379" class="wp-image-2294" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 256" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 615" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256.jpeg 601w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-256-300x189.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 601px) 100vw, 601px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-165</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark611"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark612"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark613"></a> Backing up Files</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can back up the recorded videos and snapshots.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ BACKUP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BACKUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark615"> Figure 5-166.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="458" class="wp-image-2295" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 257" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 616" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-257-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-166</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark615"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the backup parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark616"> Table 5-54.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Device Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>Device Name </strong>list, select the device that you want to back up the files to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Format</td>
<td>Click <strong>Format </strong>to format the selected device.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Path</td>
<td>Click <strong>Browse</strong>, the <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. Select the route where you want to search for the files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Record CH</td>
<td>In the <strong>Record CH </strong>list, select the channel where you want to search for the files.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select the file type that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Time</p>
<p>End Time</td>
<td>Enter the start time and end time for the files that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark616"></a> File Format</td>
<td>In the <strong>File Format </strong>list, select the file format that you want to search.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-54</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Search </strong>to search the files that meet the configured settings.</p>
<p>The searched results will display in the table.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the files that you want to back up.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Backup </strong>to back up the selected files to the configured path. Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to remove all the searched results.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark617"></a> Network Management</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="939" height="472" class="wp-image-2296" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 258" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 617" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258.jpeg 939w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-300x151.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-768x386.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-258-810x407.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 939px) 100vw, 939px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark619"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark620"></a> Configuring Network Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can ensure the network interworking between the Device and other devices through configuring the network settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark622"></a> Configuring TCP/IP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the settings for the Device such as IP address, DNS according to the networking plan.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>, the <strong>TCP/IP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark624"> Figure 5-167.</a></p>
<p>For details about parameter settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">&#8220;5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="740" height="526" class="wp-image-2297" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 259" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 618" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259.jpeg 740w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-259-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 740px) 100vw, 740px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-167</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark624"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark625"></a> Configuring Port Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone and configure each port settings.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ CONNECTION</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>CONNECTION </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark627"> Figure 5-168.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="810" height="459" class="wp-image-2298" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 260" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 619" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-260-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 810px) 100vw, 810px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-168</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark627"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark628"> Table 5-55.</a> Q2 NOTE</p>
<p>The connection parameters except Max Connection cannot take effects until the Device has been restarted.</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Max Connection</td>
<td>The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone.</p>
<p>Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>TCP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 25001. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>UDP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 25002. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>RTSP Port</td>
<td>The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>POS Port</td>
<td>Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The default value is 38800.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HTTPS Enable</td>
<td>Enable <strong>HTTPS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark628"></a> HTTPS Port</td>
<td>HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-55</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark629"></a> Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can make wireless connection between the Device and the other devices in the same network through Wi-Fi settings, facilitating the devices connection and mobility.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>Only the Device with Wi-Fi module supports this function.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network <em>■&gt;</em> Wi-Fi</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Wi-Fi </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark631"> Figure 5-169.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="816" height="460" class="wp-image-2299" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 261" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 620" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261.jpeg 816w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-261-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 816px) 100vw, 816px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-169</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark631"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the Wi-Fi connection parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark632"> Table 5-56.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Wi-Fi Auto Connect</td>
<td>Enable <strong>Wi-Fi Auto Connect</strong>.</p>
<p>After the Device is restarted, it will automatically connect to the nearest hotspot that had been connected successfully.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Refresh</td>
<td>Refresh the hotspot list. The self-adaption function such as adding password is supported if such setting was once configured.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Connect</td>
<td>In the <strong>hotpot</strong>s list, select a hotspot, and then click <strong>Connect</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>To reconnect the same hotspot, disconnect first and then</li>
</ul>
<p>reconnect.</p>
<ul>
<li>To connect to other hotspot, disconnect from the current</li>
</ul>
<p>connected hotspot first, and then connect to the other hotspot.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark632"></a> Disconnect</td>
<td>To disconnect from a hotspot, click <strong>Disconnect</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-56</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>After the Device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, in the <strong>Wi-Fi Working Info </strong>area, the current hotspot, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark633"></a> Configuring PPPoE Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the user name and password from the Internet Service Provider.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ PPPoE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>PPPoE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark635"> Figure 5-170.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="823" height="465" class="wp-image-2300" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 262" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 621" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262.jpeg 823w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-262-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 823px) 100vw, 823px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-170</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark635"></a> Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>User Name </strong>box and <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the user name and password accordingly provided by the Internet Service Provider.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears on the PPPoE interface. You can use this IP address to access the Device. CD NOTE</p>
<p>When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the <strong>TCP/IP </strong>interface cannot be modified.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark636"></a> Configuring DDNS Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the Device by using the domain.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark638"></a> Preparing for Configuration</p>
<p>Please confirm if the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.</p>
<ul>
<li>If DDNS belongs to Quick DDNS type, domain registration is not needed.</li>
<li>If DDNS belongs to other type, you need to login the DDNS website to register the information such as user name, password, and domain name.</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the information of all the connected devices under this user name.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark640"></a> Configuring Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ DDNS</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DDNS </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark642"> Figure 5-171.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="827" height="465" class="wp-image-2301" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 263" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 622" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263.jpeg 827w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-263-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 827px) 100vw, 827px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-171</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark642"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters. • DDNS type. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark643"> Table 5-57.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the DDNS function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>DDNS Type</td>
<td rowspan="2">Type and address of DDNS service provider.</p>
<ul>
<li>Type: CP Plus DDNS Free</li>
<li>Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org</li>
<li>Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Domain Name</td>
<td>The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the user name and password obtained from DDNS service provider. You need to register (including user name and password) on the website of DDNS service provider.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark643"></a> Interval</td>
<td>Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-57</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press <strong>Enter</strong>.</p>
<p>If the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the configuration is failed.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark644"></a> Configuring EMAIL Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when there is an alarm event occurs.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>EMAIL </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark646"> Figure 5-172.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="453" class="wp-image-2302" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 264" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 623" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-768x428.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-264-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="124" height="23" class="wp-image-2303" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-265.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 265" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 624"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark646"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark647"> Table 5-58.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the email function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SMTP Server</td>
<td>Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is 25. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter the user name and password of sender’s email account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anonymity</td>
<td>If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Mail Receiver</td>
<td>In the <strong>Mail Receiver </strong>list, select the number of receiver that you want to receive the notification. The Device supports up to three mail receivers.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Email Address</td>
<td>Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Sender</td>
<td>Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three senders separated by comma.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Title</td>
<td>Enter the email subject.</p>
<p>Supports Chinese, English and Arabic numerals. It supports maximum 64 characters.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Attachment</td>
<td>Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Authentication</td>
<td>Select the encryption type: <strong>NONE</strong>, <strong>SSL</strong>, or <strong>TLS</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send an email upon any alarm event.</p>
<p>This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by frequent alarm events.</p>
<p>The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Health Enable</td>
<td>Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to check the connection.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval (Min.)</td>
<td>This is the interval that the system sends a health test email. The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark647"></a> Test</td>
<td>Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</p>
<p>Before testing, click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-58</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark648"></a> Configuring UPnP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN through the IP address on the WAN.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark650"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<ul>
<li>Login the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.</li>
<li>Enable the UPnP function at the router.</li>
<li>Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP</strong>, configure the IP address into the router IP</li>
</ul>
<p>address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark652"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ UPnP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPnP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark654"> Figure 5-173.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="461" class="wp-image-2304" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 266" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 625" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-266-810x454.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-173</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark654"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark655"> Table 5-59.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td colspan="2"><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PAT</td>
<td colspan="2">Enable the UPnP function.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td colspan="4">Indicates the status of UPnP function.</p>
<p>* Offline: Failed.</p>
<p>• Online: Succeeded.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">LAN IP</td>
<td colspan="4">Enter IP address of router on the LAN.</p>
<p>Cfl NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8">After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">automatically without performing any configurations.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">WAN IP</td>
<td colspan="4">Enter IP address of router on the WAN.</p>
<p>LJ NOTE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="8">After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="6">automatically without performing any configurations.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the router.</p>
<ul>
<li>Service Name: Name of network server.</li>
<li>Protocol: Type of protocol.</li>
<li>Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device.</li>
<li>Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router.</li>
</ul>
<p>Wl NOTE</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8">the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>PAT Table</td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="9">from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="6">When there are several devices in the LAN, please</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="8">reasonably arrange the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">When establishing a mapping relationship, please ensure the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="4">mapping ports are not occupied or limited.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="9">The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">same and cannot be modified.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>•</td>
<td colspan="3">Click <strong>^3 </strong>to modify the external port.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-59</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark655"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>In the browser, enter<a href="http://wan/"> http://WAN </a>IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark656"></a> Configuring SNMP Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>. . NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to manage and control the Device from the software.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark658"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<ul>
<li>Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MG­SOFT MIB Browser</li>
<li>Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark660"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ SNMP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SNMP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark662"> Figure 5-174.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="787" height="442" class="wp-image-2305" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 267" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 626" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267.jpeg 787w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-267-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 787px) 100vw, 787px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-174</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark662"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark663"> Table 5-60.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the SNMP function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Version</td>
<td>Select the check box of SNMP version(s) that you are using.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SNMP Port</td>
<td>Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Read Community</td>
<td rowspan="2">Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Write Community</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Trap Address</td>
<td>Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send the Trap information.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark663"></a> Trap Port</td>
<td>Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap information.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-60</p>
<p>Step 3</p>
<p>Step 4</p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Step 6</p>
<p>Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.</p>
<p>Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.</p>
<p>On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and<br />
then select the version number to query.</p>
<p>On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the<br />
configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark664"></a> Configuring Multicast Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Network ^ MULTICAST</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>MULTICAST </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark666"> Figure 5-175.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="453" class="wp-image-2306" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 268" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 627" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-268-768x429.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="123" height="23" class="wp-image-2307" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-269.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 269" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 628"></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark666"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark667"> Table 5-61.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the multicast function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IP Address</td>
<td>Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP.</p>
<p>The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark667"></a> Port</td>
<td>Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through 65000.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-61</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p>You can use the multicast IP address to login the web. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark668"> Figure 5-176.</a></p>
<p>On the web login dialog box, in the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>MULTICAST</strong>. The web will automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video through multicast function.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="423" class="wp-image-2308" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 270" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 629" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270.jpeg 470w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-270-300x270.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark668"></a> Figure 5-176</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark669"></a> Configuring Register Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier for the client software to access the Device.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ REGISTER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>REGISTER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark671"> Figure 5-177.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="812" height="461" class="wp-image-2309" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 271" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 630" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271.jpeg 812w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-271-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 812px) 100vw, 812px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-177</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark671"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark672"> Table 5-62.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the register function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>No.</td>
<td>Select a number.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Server IP Address</td>
<td>Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you want to register to.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>Enter the port of the server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark672"></a> Sub Service ID</td>
<td>This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-62</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark673"></a> Configuring Alarm Center Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this function, the <strong>Alarm Upload </strong>check box must be selected. For details about alarm event settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark447">&#8220;5.10 Alarm Events Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Network ^ ALARM CENTER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ALARM CENTER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark675"> Figure 5-178.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="817" height="456" class="wp-image-2310" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 272" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 631" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272.jpeg 817w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-272-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 817px) 100vw, 817px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-178</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark675"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark676"> Table 5-63.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the alarm center function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Protocol Type</td>
<td>In the <strong>Protocol Type </strong>list, select protocol type. The default is <strong>ALARM CENTER</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</p>
<p>Port</td>
<td>The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with alarm client.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark676"></a> Self-Report Time</td>
<td>In the <strong>Self-Report Time </strong>list, select time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-63</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark677"></a> Configuring InstaOn Cloud Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can manage the devices by using InstaOn technology to download the application and register the devices. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark129">&#8220;5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark679"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark680"></a> Configuring Network Testing Settings
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark682"></a> Testing the Network</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> INFO ^ Network ^ Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Test </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark684"> Figure 5-179.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="819" height="463" class="wp-image-2311" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 273" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 632" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273.jpeg 819w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-273-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 819px) 100vw, 819px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-179</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark684"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Destination IP </strong>box, enter the IP address.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Test</strong>.</p>
<p>After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for average delay, packet loss, and network status. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark685"> Figure 5-180.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="976" height="428" class="wp-image-2312" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 274" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 633" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274.jpeg 976w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-300x132.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-768x337.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-274-810x355.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 976px) 100vw, 976px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-180</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark685"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark686"></a> Capturing Packet and Backing up</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Packet capture means the operations such as capturing, resending, and editing data that are sent and received during network transmission. When there is network abnormality, you can perform packet capturing and back up into the USB storage device. This date can be provided to the technical support for analyzing the network condition.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Info ^ Network &gt; Network Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network Test </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark688"> Figure 5-181.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="780" height="437" class="wp-image-2313" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 275" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 634" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275.jpeg 780w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-275-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 780px) 100vw, 780px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-181</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark688"></a> Step 2 Connect a USB storage device to the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Fresh</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device starts detecting the USB storage device and displays its name in the <strong>Device Name </strong>box.</p>
<p>Step 4 Select the route of the data that you want to capture and back up.</p>
<p>1) In the Network Sniffer Packet Backup, click <strong>Browse</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Browse </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark689"> Figure 5-182.</a></p>
<p>Device Name</p>
<p>Total Space</p>
<p>Free Space</p>
<p>Address</p>
<p>sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format</p>
<p>3.73 GB</p>
<p>3.27 GB</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213059.pcap</td>
<td>111.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213722.pcap</td>
<td>182.1 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>1.2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>19.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>□</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf.txt</td>
<td>1.97 MB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>Q</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>l&amp;l kmsg_printf.txt</td>
<td>1.1KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@1 pnntf_2O18O3161539O3.txt</td>
<td>964 B</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SI kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>2L2KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>W pnntf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>1.5 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® kmsg_printf_201803161S4049.txt</td>
<td>21.7 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>g</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@1 printf_2O18O316155148.txt</td>
<td>2.2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Ml kmsg_phntf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>21.6 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf_2O18O316161436.txt</td>
<td>2.5 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>fl</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Bl kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>21.9 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark689"></a> New Folder</p>
<p>Import</p>
<p>Export</p>
<p>Figure 5-182</p>
<p>2)</p>
<p>Select the route.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>If there are several USB storage devices are connected to the Device, you can select from the <strong>Device Name </strong>list.</li>
<li>Click Refresh to total space, free space and the file list in the selected USB storage device.</li>
<li>In the case of insufficient capacity, click Fl</li>
</ul>
<p>to delete the needless files.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click <strong>New Folder </strong>to create a new folder in the USB storage device.</li>
</ul>
<p>3) Click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the route selection settings.</p>
<p>The <strong>Test </strong>interface is displayed again.</p>
<p>Step 5</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="52" height="51" class="wp-image-2314" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-276.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 276" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 635"></p>
<p>to start packet capturing and backing up.</p>
<p>CO NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>Only the data packet of one LAN can be captured at one time.</li>
<li>After capturing starts, you can exit the <strong>Test </strong>interface to perform other operations</li>
</ul>
<p>such as web login and monitoring.</p>
<p>Step6 Click © to stop capturing.</p>
<p>The backup data is saved in the selected route under the naming style &#8220;LAN name- time.pcap.&#8221; See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark690"> Figure 5-183.</a> You can open it by using Wireshark software.</p>
<p>Device Name</p>
<p>Total Space</p>
<p>Free Space</p>
<p>Address</p>
<p>sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format</p>
<p>3.73 GB</p>
<p>3.27 GB</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td>Q</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® LANl-20180313213059.pcap</td>
<td>111.7 KB</td>
<td>Rte</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@ LAN 1-20180313213722.pcap</td>
<td>182.1 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>;i‘i printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>1 2 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>@ kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</td>
<td>19.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>o</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g) printf.txt</td>
<td>1.97 MB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>I«l kmsg_printf.txt</td>
<td>1.1KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>*</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>H pnntf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>964 B</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>Sk</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>(£i kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</td>
<td>2L2KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>□</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>M printf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>1.5 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>M</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>IB kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt</td>
<td>2L7KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>® printf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>22 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt</td>
<td>21.6 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>a</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>printf.20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>25 KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>81 kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</td>
<td>2L9KB</td>
<td>Rie</td>
<td>B</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>New Folder</p>
<p>Import Export</p>
<p>Figure 5-183</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark690"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark691"></a> 5.15 Configuring Account Settings</p>
<p>You can add, modify and delete user accounts, groups, and ONVIF users, and set security questions for admin account.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The user name supports 31 characters and group name supports 15 characters. The user name can be consisted of letter, number, &#8220;_&#8221;, &#8220;@&#8221;, &#8220;.&#8221;.</li>
<li>You can set maximum 64 users and 20 groups. The group name by &#8220;User&#8221; and &#8220;Admin&#8221; cannot be deleted. You can set other groups and define the relevant permissions. However, the admin account cannot be set randomly.</li>
<li>You can manage the account by user and group and the name cannot be repeated. Every user must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark693"></a> Configuring User Account
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark695"></a> Adding a User Account</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark697"> Figure 5-184.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="833" height="468" class="wp-image-2315" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 277" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 636" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277.jpeg 833w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-277-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 833px) 100vw, 833px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-184</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark697"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add User </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark698"> Figure 5-185.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="792" height="445" class="wp-image-2316" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 278" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 637" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278.jpeg 792w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-278-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 792px) 100vw, 792px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-185</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark698"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a user account. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark699"> Table 5-64.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td rowspan="2">Enter a user name and password for the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Confirm Password</td>
<td>Re-enter the password.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Memo</td>
<td>Optional.</p>
<p>Enter a description of the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User MAC</td>
<td>Enter user MAC address</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Group</td>
<td>Select a group for the account.</p>
<p>w note</p>
<p>The user rights must be within the group permission.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>Click <strong>Set </strong>to display <strong>Set </strong>interface.</p>
<p>Define a period during which the new account can login the device. The new account cannot login the device during the time beyond the set period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Authority</td>
<td>In the <strong>Authority </strong>area, select the check boxes in the <strong>System </strong>tab, <strong>Playback </strong>tab, and <strong>Monitor </strong>tab.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account authority, it is recommended not to give the authority to the common user account higher that the advanced user account.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-64</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark699"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark700"></a> Setting Permitted Period</p>
<p>Step 1 Next to <strong>Period</strong>, click <strong>Setting</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Setting </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark702"> Figure 5-186.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="774" height="437" class="wp-image-2317" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 279" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 638" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279.jpeg 774w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-279-768x434.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 774px) 100vw, 774px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-186</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark702"></a> Step 2 Define the permitted period. By default, it is active all the time. • Define the period by drawing.</p>
<p>O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.</p>
<p>O Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day, the icon</p>
<p>switches to Q</p>
<p>. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks</p>
<p>to select the active periods, all the days with Q</p>
<p>will take the same settings.</p>
<p>O Define for all days of a week: Click <strong>All</strong>, all the switches to . On the</p>
<p>timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.</p>
<p>• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.</p>
<p>1) Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="46" height="39" class="wp-image-2318" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-280.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 280" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 639"></p>
<p>The <strong>Period </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark703"> Figure 5-187.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="826" height="472" class="wp-image-2319" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 281" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 640" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281.jpeg 826w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-768x439.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-281-810x463.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 826px) 100vw, 826px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-187</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark703"></a> Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>O There are six periods for you to set for each day.</p>
<p>O Under <strong>Copy</strong>, select <strong>All </strong>to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.</p>
<ol>
<li>Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark704"></a> 5.15.1.2 Modify a User Account</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark706"> Figure 5-188.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="752" height="425" class="wp-image-2320" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 282" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 641" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282.jpeg 752w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-282-300x170.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 752px) 100vw, 752px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-188</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark706"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p>for the user account that you want to modify.</p>
<p>The <strong>Modify User </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark707"> Figure 5-189.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="809" height="453" class="wp-image-2321" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 283" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 642" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283.jpeg 809w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-283-768x430.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 809px) 100vw, 809px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-189</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark707"></a> Step 3 Change the settings for password, user name, user group, user MAC, memo, period, and authority.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 digits through 32 digits and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and &#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</p>
<p>For the admin account, you can enter or modify email address, enable/disable the unlock pattern, modify the security questions.</p>
<p>• In the <strong>Email Address </strong>box, enter the email address, and the click <strong>Save </strong>to save the setting.</p>
<p>• To use the unlock pattern, enable <strong>Unlock Pattern</strong>, click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="40" height="39" class="wp-image-2322" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-284.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 284" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 643"></p>
<p>, draw a pattern in</p>
<p>the <strong>Unlock Pattern </strong>interface, and then click <strong>Save </strong>to save the setting.</p>
<p>• Configuring security questions.</p>
<ol>
<li>) Click Security Questions.</li>
</ol>
<p>The <strong>Security Questions </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark708"> Figure 5-190.</a></p>
<p>Security Questions</p>
<p>Successfully set. Please delete it first if you want to reset security question ¡again.</p>
<p>Question 1</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="714" height="282" class="wp-image-2323" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 285" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 644" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285.jpeg 714w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-285-300x118.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 714px) 100vw, 714px" /></p>
<p>Delete</p>
<p>Figure 5-190</p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark708"></a> In the <strong>Question </strong>list, select questions and enter the answers in the Answer box.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Setting </strong>to save the settings.</li>
</ol>
<p>You can use the security questions and answers to reset the password for admin account.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>To reset the security questions, on the <strong>Security Questions</strong>, enter the correct answers for each question, and then click <strong>Delete</strong>.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark709"></a> 5.15.1.3 Deleting a User Account</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Account ^ User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark711"> Figure 5-191.</a></p>
<p>■&gt; USER</p>
<p>GROUP</p>
<p>ONVIFUSER</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark711"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="49" class="wp-image-2324" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-286.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 286" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 645"></p>
<p>1 Usa Name Group»&#8230;. Modify Mat 5«ojs MAC A.. Memo</p>
<p>I admin admin Z t Login Local admin&#8217;s account</p>
<p>AiMUfrer</p>
<p>Figure 5-191</p>
<p>for the user account that you want to delete.</p>
<p>A <strong>Message </strong>is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to delete a user account.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark712"></a> Configuring Group Account
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark714"></a> Adding a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark716"> Figure 5-192.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="460" class="wp-image-2325" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 287" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 646" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-287-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-192</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark716"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark717"> Figure 5-193.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="768" height="428" class="wp-image-2326" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 288" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 647" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-288-300x167.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 768px) 100vw, 768px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-193</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark717"></a> Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a group. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark718"> Table 5-65.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Group Name</td>
<td>Enter a name for the group.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Memo</td>
<td>Optional.</p>
<p>Enter a description of the account.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark718"></a> Authority</td>
<td>In the <strong>Authority </strong>area, select the check boxes in the <strong>System </strong>tab, <strong>Playback </strong>tab, and <strong>Monitor </strong>tab.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-65</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark719"></a> Modifying a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark721"> Figure 5-194.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="626" class="wp-image-2327" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 289" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 648" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289-300x232.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-289-768x593.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-194</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark721"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="42" class="wp-image-2328" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-290.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 290" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 649"></p>
<p>for the group account that you want to modify.</p>
<p>Step 3 The <strong>Modify Group </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark722"> Figure 5-195.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="811" height="456" class="wp-image-2329" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 291" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 650" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291.jpeg 811w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-291-768x432.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 811px) 100vw, 811px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-195</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark722"></a> Step 4 Change the settings for group name, memo, and authority.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>OK </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark723"></a> Deleting a Group</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Account ^ Group</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>GROUP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark725"> Figure 5-196.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>USER</td>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td><strong>GlCu® Nd inc</strong></td>
<td>Miriiiy</td>
<td><strong>Ddclc</strong></td>
<td><strong>Memo</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>□ROUP</strong></td>
<td><strong>1</strong></td>
<td><strong>admin</strong></td>
<td><strong>z</strong></td>
<td>fl</td>
<td><strong>aAnimâraMr ¡¡roup</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>onvif<strong> use n</strong></td>
<td><strong>2</strong></td>
<td><strong>user</strong></td>
<td><strong>/</strong></td>
<td>fl</td>
<td><strong>user 9*aup</strong></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Add Owp</p>
<p>Figure 5-196</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark725"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="51" height="49" class="wp-image-2330" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-292.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 292" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 651"></p>
<p>for the user account that you want to delete.</p>
<p>A <strong>Message </strong>is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to delete a group.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark726"></a> Configuring Onvif Users</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>The device manufactured by other company can connect to the Device through Onvif protocol by an authorized Onvif account.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<p>The admin account is created for Onvif users right after the Device has been initialized</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Account ^ ONVIF USER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ONVIF USER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark728"> Figure 5-197.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="476" class="wp-image-2331" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 293" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 652" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-293-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-197</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark728"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add User</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add User/Modify </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark729"> Figure 5-198.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="542" height="419" class="wp-image-2332" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 294" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 653" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294.jpeg 542w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-294-300x232.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 542px) 100vw, 542px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-198</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark729"></a> Step 3 Enter user name, password, and select the group that you want this account to belong to.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>Click □ to modify the account; Click Fl</p>
<p>to delete the account.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark730"></a> 5.16 Voice Management</p>
<p>Voice management function manages audio files and configures the playing schedule. When there is an alarm event, the audio file can be activated.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark732"></a> Configuring Audio Files</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio volume.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ FILE MANAGER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FILE MANAGER </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark734"> Figure 5-199.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="828" height="662" class="wp-image-2333" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 295" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 654" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295.jpeg 828w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-300x240.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-768x614.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-295-810x648.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 828px) 100vw, 828px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-199</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark734"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Add </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark735"> Figure 5-200.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td colspan="5">Browse</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="3">Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) 3.71GB/3.73GB(Free/Total)</td>
<td>Refresh</td>
<td>Format</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="5">Address /</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="5"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Name</td>
<td>Size</td>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Delete</td>
<td>Play</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ (fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb)</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ ScreenShot</td>
<td></td>
<td>Folder</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>■ printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g| SmartPlayer.exe.Ink</td>
<td>1.7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>8</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_&#8230;</td>
<td>26 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a ty.lnk</td>
<td>L7 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td>□</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>a printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>g kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk</td>
<td>1.8 KB</td>
<td>File</td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>New Folder</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>OK</td>
<td>Back</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-200</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark735"></a> Step 3 Select the audio files that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>OK </strong>to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.</p>
<p>If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the <strong>FILE MANAGER </strong>interface. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark736"> Figure 5-201.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="814" height="627" class="wp-image-2334" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 296" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 655" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296.jpeg 814w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-300x231.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-768x592.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-296-810x624.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 814px) 100vw, 814px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-201</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark736"></a> The imported audio files are automatically saved into the HDD, so you do not need to connect to the USB storage device to get the file next time.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="40" class="wp-image-2335" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-297.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 297" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 656"></p>
<p>to play the audio file.</p>
<p>Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="43" height="41" class="wp-image-2336" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-298.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 298" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 657"></p>
<p>to rename the audio file.</p>
<ul>
<li>Click to delete the audio file.</li>
<li>To decrease or increase the playing volume, move the slider to the left or to the right.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark737"></a> 5.16.2 Configuring Playing Schedule for Audio Files</p>
<p>You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ SCHEDULE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SCHEDULE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark739"> Figure 5-202.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="702" height="394" class="wp-image-2337" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 299" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 658" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299.jpeg 702w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-299-300x168.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 702px) 100vw, 702px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-202</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark739"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark740"> Table 5-66.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Period</td>
<td>In the <strong>Period </strong>box, enter the time. Select the check box to enable the settings.</p>
<p>You can configure up to six periods.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>File Name</td>
<td>In the <strong>File Name </strong>list, select the audio file that you want to play for this configured period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Interval</td>
<td>In the <strong>Interval </strong>box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to repeat the playing.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Repeat</td>
<td>Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the defined period.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark740"></a> Output</td>
<td>Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has the priority.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-66</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</p>
<p>• The finish time for audio playing is decided by audio file size and the configured interval.</p>
<p>•</p>
<p>Playing priority: Alarm event &gt; Talkback &gt; Trial listening &gt; Audio file.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark741"></a> 5.17 Storage Management</p>
<p>Storage management function manages the stored resources such as recorded video files and storage space. The function aims at providing easier operation and improving the storage efficiency.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="897" height="502" class="wp-image-2338" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 300" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 659" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300.jpeg 897w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-768x430.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-300-810x453.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 897px) 100vw, 897px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark743"></a> Configuring Basic Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage <em>■+</em> BASIC</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>BASIC </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark745"> Figure 5-203.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="557" class="wp-image-2339" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 301" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 660" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301-300x212.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-301-768x543.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-203</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark745"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the basic settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark746"> Table 5-67.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD Full</td>
<td>Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Stop Record </strong>to stop recording</li>
<li>Select <strong>Overwrite </strong>to overwrite the recorded video files</li>
</ul>
<p>always from the earliest time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Pack Mode</td>
<td>Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark746"></a> Auto-Delete Old Files</td>
<td>Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the N days.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-67</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark747"></a> Configuring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark749"></a> The system starts recording and taking snapshot according to the configured schedule. For details, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark149">&#8220;5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">&#8220;5.1.4.10 Configuring</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark157">Snapshot Storage ScheduleConfiguring Snapshot Storage Schedule&#8221;</a></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark750"></a> Configuring HDD Manager</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the HDD information, format HDD, and configure the HDD type through HDD manager.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ HDD MANAGER</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>HDD MANAGER </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark752"> Figure 5-204.</a></p>
<p>In the table, you can view the information of current HDD, such as device name, HDD type, status, total space and free space, and serial number of the HDD port.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="726" height="559" class="wp-image-2340" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 302" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 661" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302.jpeg 726w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-302-300x231.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 726px) 100vw, 726px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-204</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark752"></a> Step 2 Configuring the settings for the HDD manager.</p>
<ul>
<li>HDD type setting: In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Read/Write</strong>, <strong>Read-Only </strong>or <strong>Redundant</strong>, and then click <strong>Apply </strong>to save the settings.</li>
<li>HDD format: Select the HDD that you want to format, click <strong>Format</strong>, in the pop-up message, click <strong>OK </strong>to start formatting, and then following the onscreen message to complete formatting.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark753"></a> 5.17.4 Configuring HDD Group</p>
<p>You can configure the HDD group to save the specified main stream, sub stream and snapshots</p>
<p>to the designated HDD group.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2341" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-303.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 303" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 662"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>If &#8220;Current HDD Mode is Quota Mode&#8221; is shown on the interface, you need to switch to HDD mode.</li>
<li>You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu &gt; STORAGE &gt; ADVANCE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>ADVANCE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark755"> Figure 5-205.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="750" height="584" class="wp-image-2342" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 304" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 663" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304.jpeg 750w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-304-300x234.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 750px) 100vw, 750px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-205</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark755"></a> Step 2 Select the group for each HDD group, and then click <strong>Save </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Step 3 After configuring HDD group, under the <strong>Main Stream </strong>tab, <strong>Sub Stream </strong>tab and <strong>Snapshot </strong>tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot to different HDD group as selected by you. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark756"> Figure 5-206,</a><a href="#post-2037-bookmark757"> Figure 5-207,</a> and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark758"> Figure 5­208.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>HDD</td>
<td><strong>Main Stream</strong></td>
<td colspan="2">Sub Steam</td>
<td></td>
<td>Snnpshol</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">SCHEDULE</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2">Current HDD Mode is HDD Group.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD MANAGER</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">&gt; ADVANCE</td>
<td colspan="2">Set AJI Charnel* 1</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>Adi</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>QUOTA</td>
<td>ÇKırnH</td>
<td>Group Channel</td>
<td>Group</td>
<td colspan="2">Chitnncl</td>
<td>Group</td>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Group</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>1</td>
<td>1 ’ 2</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>3</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>4</td>
<td>1</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>HDD DETECT</td>
<td>5</td>
<td>1 &#8211; §</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>7</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>8</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>REC ESTIMATE</td>
<td>9</td>
<td>1 * 10</td>
<td>1 W</td>
<td>11</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>12</td>
<td>1 *</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>FTP</td>
<td>13</td>
<td>1 * 14</td>
<td>1 ’</td>
<td>15</td>
<td></td>
<td>1 •</td>
<td>Ifl</td>
<td>1 •</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Apply <sup>c</sup>«<sup>n</sup>“<sup>i</sup></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark756"></a> Figure 5-206</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="771" height="599" class="wp-image-2343" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 305" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 664" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305.jpeg 771w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-305-768x597.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 771px) 100vw, 771px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark757"></a> Figure 5-207</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="770" height="597" class="wp-image-2344" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 306" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 665" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306.jpeg 770w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-306-768x595.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 770px) 100vw, 770px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-208</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark758"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark759"></a> 5.17.5 Configuring HDD Detecting Settings</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>Not all models support this function.</p>
<p>HDD detecting function detects the current status of HDD to let you know the HDD performance and replace the defective HDD.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark761"></a> Detecting HDD</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can detect HDD by quick detect and global detect.</p>
<ul>
<li>Quick detect: Detect the files saved in HDD. The detected bad track can be repaired by formatting. If there are no files in HDD, the system cannot detect the bad track.</li>
<li>Global detect: Detect the whole HDD through Windows, which takes time and might affect the HDD that is recording the video.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■+</em> Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Detect </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark763"> Figure 5-209.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="793" height="445" class="wp-image-2345" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 307" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 666" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307.jpeg 793w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-307-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 793px) 100vw, 793px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-209</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark763"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select <strong>Quick Detect </strong>or <strong>Global Detect</strong>; and in the <strong>HDD </strong>list, select the HDD that you want to detect.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Start Detect</strong>.</p>
<p>The system starts detecting the HDD. After detecting is completed, see<a href="#post-2037-bookmark764"> Figure 5-210.</a></p>
<p>Q NOTE</p>
<p>During detecting, click <strong>Pause </strong>to pause detecting, click <strong>Continue </strong>to restart detecting, and click <strong>Stop Detect </strong>to stop detecting.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="853" height="479" class="wp-image-2346" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 308" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 667" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308.jpeg 853w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-768x431.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-308-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 853px) 100vw, 853px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-210</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark764"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark765"></a> View Detecting Results</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>After the detecting is completed, you can view the detecting reports to find out the problem and</p>
<p>replace the defective HDD to avoid data loss.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Report</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Report </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark767"> Figure 5-211.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="737" height="416" class="wp-image-2347" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 309" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 668" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309.jpeg 737w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-309-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 737px) 100vw, 737px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-211</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark767"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Details </strong>interface is displayed. You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark768"> Figure 5-212 </a>and<a href="#post-2037-bookmark769"> Figure 5-213.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="718" height="539" class="wp-image-2348" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 310" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 669" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310.jpeg 718w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-310-300x225.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 718px) 100vw, 718px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark768"></a> Figure 5-212</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="767" height="562" class="wp-image-2349" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 311" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 670" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311.jpeg 767w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-311-300x220.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 767px) 100vw, 767px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-213</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark769"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark770"></a> Configuring Quota Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the quote for each channel to be saved into each HDD.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2350" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-312.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 312" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 671"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>If &#8220;Current HDD Mode is HDD Mode&#8221; is shown on the interface, you need to switch to Quota mode.</li>
<li>You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Storage ^ QUOTA</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>QUOTA </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark772"> Figure 5-214.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>Current HEX) Mode is</td>
<td>HOD Group</td>
<td>Change lo Quota Mode</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>QUOTA</td>
<td>HEX) Que</p>
<p>SATAI</td>
<td>4a</td>
<td>SATA2</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>REC ESTIMATE</p>
<p>FTP</td>
<td>SATA3</p>
<p>SATAS</p>
<p>SATA7</td>
<td></td>
<td>SATA4</p>
<p>SA TAG</p>
<p>SATAS</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>Apply</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-214</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark772"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Channe</strong>l list, select the channel that you want to configure.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>SATA </strong>list, select the quota for the selected channel.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.</p>
<p>Click <strong>Statistic</strong>s to view the quota of each channel. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark773"> Figure 5-215.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="591" height="466" class="wp-image-2351" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 313" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 672" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313.jpeg 591w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-313-300x237.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 591px) 100vw, 591px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark773"></a> Figure 5-215</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark774"></a> Configuring Record Estimate</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ STORAGE ^ REC ESTIMATE</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark776"> Figure 5-216.</a></p>
<p>STORAGE Storage / STORAGE / REC ESTIMATE</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>BASIC</td>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Edit</td>
<td>Bit Rate(Kb/S)</td>
<td>Record Time</td>
<td>Resolution</td>
<td>Frame Rate</td>
<td>•</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 1</td>
<td>X</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SCHEDULE</td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 2</td>
<td>Z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">HDD MANAGER</td>
<td>V 3</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>V 4</td>
<td>✓&#8221;</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">HDD DETECT</td>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 5</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 6</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td rowspan="2">REC ESTIMATE</td>
<td>V 7</td>
<td></td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td>=</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong><em>•J</em></strong> 8</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>■J</em></strong> 9</td>
<td></td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 10</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 11</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 12</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>1024</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280&#215;720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong><em>J</em></strong> 13</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720{720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>V 14</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280’720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>15</td>
<td></td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>16</td>
<td>z</td>
<td>2048</td>
<td>24</td>
<td>1280*720(720P)</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="5">17 / 2048 24 1280*720(720P)</p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</td>
<td>25</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Figure 5-216</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark776"></a> Step 2 Click</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="48" height="41" class="wp-image-2352" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-314.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 314" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 673"></p>
<p>The <strong>Edit </strong>dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark777"> Figure 5-217.</a></p>
<p>You can configure the resolution, frame rate, bit rate and record time for the selected channel.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="531" height="346" class="wp-image-2353" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 315" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 674" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315.jpeg 531w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-315-300x195.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 531px) 100vw, 531px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-217</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark777"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>OK </strong>to save the settings.</p>
<p>Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to the channels settings and HDD capacity.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<p>Click <strong>Copy </strong>to copy the settings to other channels.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark778"></a> Calculating Recording Time</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface, click the <strong>Known Space </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Known Space </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark780"> Figure 5-218.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB= 0 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-218</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark780"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Select</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Select HDD(s) </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="491" height="329" class="wp-image-2354" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 316" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 675" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316.jpeg 491w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-316-300x201.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 491px) 100vw, 491px" /></p>
<p>Step 3 Select the check box of the HDD that you want to calculate.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Known Space </strong>tab, in the <strong>Time </strong>box, the recording time is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark781"> Figure</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark781">5-219.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Capacity 2.000 TB= 2000 GB Select</p>
<p>Time 10 Days</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-219</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark781"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark782"></a> Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage</p>
<p>Step 1 On the <strong>REC ESTIMATE </strong>interface, click the <strong>Known Time </strong>tab.</p>
<p>The <strong>Known Time </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark784"> Figure 5-220.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Time 0 Days</p>
<p>Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.</p>
<p>Figure 5-220</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark784"></a> Step 2 In the <strong>Time </strong>box, enter the time period that you want to record.</p>
<p>In the <strong>Capacity </strong>box, the required HDD capacity is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark786"> Figure 5-221.</a></p>
<p>Known Space Known Time</p>
<p>Time 2 Days</p>
<p>Capacity 0.376 TB = 376 GB</p>
<p>Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record penod</p>
<p>Figure 5-221</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark785"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark786"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark787"></a> Configuring FTP Storage Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark789"></a> Preparation for Configuration</p>
<p>Purchase or download a FTP server and install it on your PC.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<p>For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded videos and snapshots will be failed.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark791"></a> Configuration Steps</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Storage <em>•+</em> FTP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>FTP </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark793"> Figure 5-222.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="465" class="wp-image-2355" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 317" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 676" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-317-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-222</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark793"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark794"> Table 5-68.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the FTP upload function.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Host IP</td>
<td>IP address of the PC that is installed with FTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Port</td>
<td>The default is 21.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Anonymity</td>
<td>Enter the user name and password to login the FTP server.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>User Name</td>
<td>Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Password</td>
<td>anonymously without entering the user name and password.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Remote Directory</td>
<td>Create folder on FTP server.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system</li>
</ul>
<p>automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.</p>
<ul>
<li>If you enter the name of remote directory, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>creates the folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first, and then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>File Length(M)</td>
<td>Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is less than the recorded video length,</li>
</ul>
<p>only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is more than the recorded video length,</li>
</ul>
<p>the whole recorded video can be uploaded.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be</li>
</ul>
<p>uploaded.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Image Upload Interval (Sec.)</td>
<td>
<ul>
<li>If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system</li>
</ul>
<p>uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds.</p>
<ul>
<li>To configure the snapshot interval, select <strong>Main Menu ^</strong></li>
</ul>
<p><strong>Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Channel</td>
<td>Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Week Day</p>
<p>Period 1, Period 2</td>
<td>Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload the recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark794"></a> Record type</td>
<td>Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the configured time period.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-68</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Test</strong>.</p>
<p>The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, please check the network connection or configurations.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark795"></a> 5.18 Configuring System Settings</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1005" height="569" class="wp-image-2356" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 318" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 677" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318.jpeg 1005w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-768x435.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-318-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1005px) 100vw, 1005px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark797"></a> Configuring General System Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can configure the device basic settings, time settings, and holiday settings.</p>
<p>For details about basic and time settings, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark114">&#8220;5.1.4.2 Configuring General Settings&#8221;</a> and <a href="#post-2037-bookmark119">&#8220;5.1.4.3 Configuring Date and Time Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>To configure the holiday settings, do the following:</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System^ GENERAL ^ Holiday</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Holiday </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark799"> Figure 5-223.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="788" height="442" class="wp-image-2357" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 319" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 678" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319.jpeg 788w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-319-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 788px) 100vw, 788px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark799"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Add a Holiday</strong>.</p>
<p>Figure 5-223</p>
<p>The <strong>Add a Holiday </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark800"> Figure 5-224.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="675" height="389" class="wp-image-2358" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 320" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 679" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320.jpeg 675w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-320-300x173.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 675px) 100vw, 675px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-224</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark800"></a> Step 3 Configure the holiday name, repeat mode, time range according to your actual situation.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click <strong>Add</strong>.</p>
<p>The added holiday information is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark801"> Figure 5-225.</a> ED NOTE</p>
<p>Enable the <strong>Add More </strong>function, so you can continue adding holiday information.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="808" height="456" class="wp-image-2359" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 321" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 680" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321.jpeg 808w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-321-768x433.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 808px) 100vw, 808px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-225</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark801"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark802"></a> Configuring RS232 Port Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^System ^ RS232</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>RS232 </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark804"> Figure 5-226.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="577" class="wp-image-2360" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 322" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 681" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322.jpeg 862w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-300x201.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-768x514.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-322-810x542.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-226</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark804"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for RS232 port parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark805"> Table 5-69.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Function</td>
<td>In the Function list, select the protocol for the port.</p>
<ul>
<li>Console: Debug by connecting a mini terminal software.</li>
<li>Keyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated</li>
</ul>
<p>keyboard.</p>
<ul>
<li>Adapter: Transit data by connecting to PC.</li>
<li>Protocol COM: This function is for card overlay.</li>
<li>NetKeyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated</li>
</ul>
<p>keyboard to the LAN port.</p>
<ul>
<li>PTZ Matrix: Connect the video matrix for control.</li>
</ul>
<p>The default setting is <strong>Console</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Baudrate</td>
<td>In the <strong>Baudrate </strong>list, select a value for baudrate length. The default setting is <strong>115200</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Data Bits</td>
<td>In the <strong>Data Bits </strong>list, select <strong>5</strong>, <strong>6</strong>, <strong>7</strong>, or <strong>8</strong>. The default setting is <strong>8</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Stop Bits</td>
<td>In the <strong>Stop Bits </strong>list, select <strong>1</strong>, <strong>1.5</strong>, or <strong>2</strong>.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark805"></a> Parity</td>
<td>In the <strong>Parity </strong>list, select <strong>None</strong>, <strong>Odd</strong>, <strong>Even</strong>, <strong>Mark</strong>, or <strong>Null</strong>. The default setting is <strong>None</strong>.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-69</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark806"></a> Configuring Security Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>To ensure the network security and protect data, you can configure the access permission to the Device from host IP (host IP means the PC or server that has an IP).</p>
<ul>
<li>White list includes the host IP that are permitted to access the Device.</li>
<li>Back list includes the host IP that are not permitted to access the Device.</li>
<li>Updata time white list includes the host IP that are permitted to sync the Device time.
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark808"></a> Configuring Access Right</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Access Right</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Access Right </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark810"> Figure 5-227.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="855" height="486" class="wp-image-2361" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 323" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 682" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323.jpeg 855w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-768x437.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-323-810x460.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 855px) 100vw, 855px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-227</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark810"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the security parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark811"> Table 5-70.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>In the Type list, you can select Limits of network-whitelist, Limits of network-blacklist, or Updata time-whitelist.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Enable</td>
<td>Enable the security settings.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Start Address</td>
<td>Enter a single IP address or a start IP address of a network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Add IP Address</td>
<td>Click <strong>Add IP Address </strong>to add a single IP address.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>End Address</td>
<td>Enter the end IP address of a network segment.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark811"></a> Add IP Segment</td>
<td>Click <strong>Add IP Segment </strong>to add the IP addresses from the start IP through the end IP.</p>
<p>CQ NOTE</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>The system supports up to 64 IP addresses.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-70</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark812"></a> Enabling Password Reset</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Password Reset</strong>, the <strong>Password Reset </strong>interface</p>
<p>is displayed. The <strong>Enable </strong>check box is selected by default. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark814"> Figure 5-228.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2362" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-324.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 324" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 683"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>If you clear the <strong>Enable </strong>check box, you can only use the security questions to reset the password. Make sure you have set the security questions before clearing the check box.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="730" height="412" class="wp-image-2363" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 325" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 684" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325.jpeg 730w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-325-300x169.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 730px) 100vw, 730px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-228</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark814"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark815"></a> Configuring System Maintenance Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when the Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the service life.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> System ^ System Maintain</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>SYSTEM MAINTAIN </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark817"> Figure 5-229.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="777" height="436" class="wp-image-2364" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 326" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 685" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326.jpeg 777w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326-300x168.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-326-768x431.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 777px) 100vw, 777px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-229</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark817"></a> Step 2 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark819"> Table 5-71.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Auto Reboot</td>
<td colspan="2">In the <strong>Auto Reboot </strong>list, select the reboot time.</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Case Fan Mode</td>
<td colspan="3">In the <strong>Case Fan Mode </strong>list, you can select <strong>Always run </strong>or <strong>Auto</strong>.</p>
<p>If you select <strong>Auto</strong>, the case fan will stop or start according to the external conditions such as the Device temperature.</p>
<p>CQ <strong>NOTE</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td colspan="2">Not all models support this function, and it is only supported on</td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td>the local configuration interface.</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-71</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Apply </strong>to complete the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark818"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark819"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark820"></a> Exporting and Importing System Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the same setup.</p>
<p>NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other interfaces.</li>
<li>When you open the <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current directory as the first root directory.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Format </strong>to format the USB storage device.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark822"></a> Exporting System Settings</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ IMP/EXP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark824"> Figure 5-230.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="790" height="447" class="wp-image-2365" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 327" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 686" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327.jpeg 790w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-327-768x435.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 790px) 100vw, 790px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-230</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark824"></a> Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh the interface.</p>
<p>The connected USB storage device is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark825"> Figure 5-231.</a></p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td>Ji</td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td>S Ô</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SYSTEM</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>System</strong></td>
<td><strong>/ SYSTEM</strong></td>
<td><strong>/ IMP/EXP</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>GENERAL</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Device Name sdal(USBUSB)</strong></td>
<td><strong>Refresh</strong></td>
<td><strong>Format</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SECURITY</strong></td>
<td><strong>Total Space 3.73 GB</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Free Space 3.27 GB</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>SYSTEM MAINTAIN</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Address /</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>IMP/EXP</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Name</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Size</strong></td>
<td><strong>Typ«</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Delete</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>DEFAULT</strong></td>
<td><strong>■ ScreenShot</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Folder</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>&amp; LANl-20180313213059.pcap</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>111.7 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><strong>UPGRADE</strong></td>
<td><strong>® LAN 1-20180313213722.peap</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>182.1 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>■ printf_20180314111548.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.2 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>3 kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>19.8 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>® printf.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.97 MB</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>iffl kmsg_printf.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>LI KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Rie</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B| printf_20180316153903.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>964 B</strong></td>
<td><strong>File</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>g) kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2L2KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>K printf_20180316154049.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>1.5 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>@ kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>21.7 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>Q printf_20180316155148.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2.2 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>21.6 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Fite</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>® printf_20180316161436.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2.5 KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>Fite</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td></td>
<td><strong>a kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>2L9KB</strong></td>
<td><strong>file</strong></td>
<td></td>
<td><strong>B</strong></td>
<td></td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p><strong>New Folder</strong></p>
<p><strong>Import Export</strong></p>
<p>Figure 5-231</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark825"></a> Step 4 Click <strong>Export</strong>.</p>
<p>There is a folder under the name style of &#8220;Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]&#8221;. Double­click this folder to view the backup files.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark826"></a> Importing System Settings</p>
<p>Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the exported configuration files from another Device) into one of the USB ports on the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select <strong>Main Menu &gt; SYSTEM &gt; IMP/EXP</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>IMP/EXP </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Refresh </strong>to refresh the interface.</p>
<p>The connected USB storage device is displayed.</p>
<p>Step 4 Click on the configuration folder (under the name style of &#8220;Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]&#8221;) that you want to import.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Import</strong>.</p>
<p>The Device will reboot after the imported is succeeded.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark828"></a> Restoring Default Settings</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Œ NOTE</p>
<p>Only Admin account supports this function.</p>
<p>You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Default</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>DEFAULT </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark830"> Figure 5-232.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="839" height="474" class="wp-image-2366" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 328" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 687" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328.jpeg 839w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-328-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 839px) 100vw, 839px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-232</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark830"></a> Step 2 Restore the settings.</p>
<ul>
<li>Select the settings that you want to restore, and then click <strong>Apply</strong>. The system starts restoring the selected settings.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Factory Default</strong>, and then click <strong>OK</strong>. The system starts restoring the whole settings.</li>
</ul>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark831"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark832"></a> 5.18.7 Upgrading the Device</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark834"></a> Upgrading File</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.</p>
<p>Step 2 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark836"> Figure 5-233.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="895" height="511" class="wp-image-2367" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 329" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 688" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329.jpeg 895w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-768x438.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-329-810x462.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 895px) 100vw, 895px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-233</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark836"></a> Step 3 Click <strong>System Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>System Upgrade </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark837"> Figure 5-234.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="582" height="413" class="wp-image-2368" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 330" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 689" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330.jpeg 582w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-330-300x213.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 582px) 100vw, 582px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-234</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark837"></a> Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.</p>
<p>The selected file is displayed in the <strong>Update File </strong>box.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Start</strong>.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark838"></a> Performing Online Upgrade</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the system.</p>
<p>Before using this function, you need to check if there is any new version by auto check or manual check.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.</li>
<li>Manual check: Perform real-time check if there is any new version available.</li>
</ul>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<p>Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the upgrading might be failed.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>UPGRADE </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark840"> Figure 5-235.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="786" height="449" class="wp-image-2369" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 331" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 690" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331.jpeg 786w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-331-768x439.jpeg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 786px) 100vw, 786px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-235</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark840"></a> Step 2 Check if there is any new version available.</p>
<ul>
<li>Auto check: Enable Auto-check for updates.</li>
<li>Manual check: Click Manual Check.</li>
</ul>
<p>The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check result is displayed.</p>
<ul>
<li>If the &#8220;It is the latest version&#8221; text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.</li>
<li>If the text indicating there is a new version, please go the step 3. See Figure 5­</li>
</ul>
<p>236.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="883" height="503" class="wp-image-2370" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 332" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 691" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332.jpeg 883w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-300x171.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-768x437.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-332-810x461.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 883px) 100vw, 883px" /></p>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Upgrade now</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark841"></a> 5.18.7.3 Uboot Upgrading</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="76" height="66" class="wp-image-2371" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-333.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 333" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 692"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be &#8220;u-bootbin.img&#8221; file and &#8220;update.img&#8221; file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.</li>
<li>Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.</li>
</ul>
<p>When starting the Device, the system automatically check if there is a USB storage device connected and if there is any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark843"></a> 5.19 Viewing Information</p>
<p>You can view the information such as log information, HDD information, and version details</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="894" height="499" class="wp-image-2372" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 334" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 693" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334.jpeg 894w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-300x167.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-768x429.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-334-810x452.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 894px) 100vw, 894px" /></p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark845"></a> Viewing Version Details</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the version details such as device model, system version, and build date.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Version</strong>, the <strong>VERSION </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark848"> Figure 5-237.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="473" class="wp-image-2373" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 335" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 694" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-768x436.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-335-810x459.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-237</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark847"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark848"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark849"></a> Viewing Log Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view and search the log information.</p>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>If there is no HDD installed, the system can save up to 10,000 logs.</li>
<li>If there is HDD installed and has been formatted, the system can save up to 500,000 logs.</li>
<li>If there is HDD installed, the logs about system operations are saved in the memory of the</li>
</ul>
<p>Device and other types of logs are saved into the HDD. If there is no HDD installed, the other types of logs are also saved in the memory of the Device.</p>
<ul>
<li>When formatting the HDD, the logs will not be lost. However, if you take out the HDD from the Device, the logs might be lost.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> INFO </strong>^ <strong>LOG</strong>, the <strong>LOG </strong>interface is displayed. See Figure 5­</p>
<p>238.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="837" height="473" class="wp-image-2374" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 336" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 695" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336.jpeg 837w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-300x170.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-768x434.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-336-810x458.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 837px) 100vw, 837px" /></p>
<p>Step 2 In the <strong>Type </strong>list, select the log type that you want to view (<strong>System</strong>, <strong>Config</strong>, <strong>Storage</strong>, <strong>Record</strong>, <strong>Account</strong>, <strong>Clear</strong>, <strong>Playback</strong>, and <strong>Connection</strong>) or select <strong>All </strong>to view all logs.</p>
<p>Step 3 In the <strong>Start Time </strong>box and <strong>End Time </strong>box, enter the time period to search, and then click <strong>Search</strong>.</p>
<p>The search results are displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark851"> Figure 5-239.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="489" class="wp-image-2375" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 337" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 696" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-337-810x455.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-239</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="100" height="28" class="wp-image-2376" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-338.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 338" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 697"></p>
<ul>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark851"></a> Click <strong>Details </strong>or double-click the log that you want to view, the <strong>Detailed Information </strong>interface is displayed. Click <strong>Next </strong>or <strong>Previous </strong>to view more log information.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Backup </strong>to back up the logs into the USB storage device.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Clear </strong>to remove all logs.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark852"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark853"></a> Viewing Event Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the event information of the Device and channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Event</strong>, the <strong>EVENT </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark855"> Figure 5-240.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="870" height="491" class="wp-image-2377" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 339" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 698" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339.jpeg 870w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-768x433.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-339-810x457.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 870px) 100vw, 870px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-240</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark855"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark856"></a> Viewing Network Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the online users, network data transmission details, and test network. For details about testing network, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark679">&#8220;5.14.2.1 Testing the Network.</a>&#8221;</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark858"></a> Viewing Online Users</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the online user information and block any user for a period of time.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Network ^ Online users</strong>, the <strong>Online users </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark860"> Figure 5-241.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="834" height="469" class="wp-image-2378" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 340" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 699" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340.jpeg 834w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-340-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 834px) 100vw, 834px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark860"></a> Figure 5-241</p>
<p>To block an online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The</p>
<p>maximum value you can set is 65535.</p>
<p>The system detects every 5 seconds to check if there is any user added or deleted, and update the user list timely.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark861"></a> Viewing the Network Load</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.</p>
<p>Step 1 Select <strong>Main Menu <em>■&gt;</em> Info ^ NETWORK ^ Network Load</strong>.</p>
<p>The <strong>Network Load </strong>interface is displayed.See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark863"> Figure 5-242.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="56" height="32" class="wp-image-2379" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-341.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 341" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 700"></p>
<p>VERSION</p>
<p>LOG</p>
<p>EVENT</p>
<p><img src="https://s.w.org/images/core/emoji/17.0.2/72x72/2666.png" alt="♦" class="wp-smiley" style="height: 1em; max-height: 1em;" /> ASO</p>
<p>Info / INFO / NETWORK</p>
<p>Online User</p>
<p>Network Load</p>
<p>Network Test</p>
<p>Name MAC Address Status</p>
<p>LANI 20:18:02:09:11:34 Succeed</p>
<p>IP Address Type</p>
<p>172.8.2.51 Ethernet</p>
<p>MTU</p>
<p>1500</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="627" height="252" class="wp-image-2380" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 342" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 701" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342.jpeg 627w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-342-300x121.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 627px) 100vw, 627px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-242</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark863"></a> Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.</p>
<p>The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.</p>
<p>ED NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The default display is LAN1 load.</li>
<li>Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark864"></a> Viewing HDD Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ HDD</strong>, the <strong>HDD </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark866"> Figure 5-243.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="822" height="644" class="wp-image-2381" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 343" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 702" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343.jpeg 822w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-300x235.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-768x602.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-343-810x635.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 822px) 100vw, 822px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-243</p>
<table>
<tbody>
<tr>
<td><a id="post-2037-bookmark866"></a><strong>Parameter</strong></td>
<td><strong>Description</strong></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>SATA</td>
<td>Indicates the quantity of HDD that can be installed. The total quantity is different depending on the model you purchased.</p>
<ul>
<li>o: HDD is in normal working status.</li>
<li>-: No HDD is installed.</li>
</ul>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>No.</td>
<td>Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. <strong>* </strong>means the current working HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Type</td>
<td>Indicates HDD type.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Total Space</td>
<td>Indicates the total capacity of HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Free Space</td>
<td>Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>Status</td>
<td>Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td>S.M.A.R.T</td>
<td>View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
<p>Table 5-72</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark867"></a> Viewing Device Status</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the information such as CPU temperature and memory usage to know the device status.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ INFO ^ DEVICE STATUS</strong>, the <strong>DEVICE STATUS </strong>interface is displayed.</p>
<p>See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark869"> Figure 5-244.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="820" height="637" class="wp-image-2382" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 344" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 703" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344.jpeg 820w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-300x233.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-768x597.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-344-810x629.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 820px) 100vw, 820px" /></p>
<p>Figure 5-244</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark869"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark870"></a> Viewing Channel Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the camera information connected to each channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ Channel Info</strong>, the <strong>CHANNEL INFO </strong>interface is displayed. See <a href="#post-2037-bookmark872">Figure 5-245.</a></p>
<p>VERSION</p>
<p>NETWORK</p>
<p>HDD</p>
<p>DEVICE STATUS</p>
<p>»■ CHANNEL INFO</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="209" height="288" class="wp-image-2383" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-345.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 345" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 704"></p>
<p>Figure 5-245</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark872"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark873"></a> Viewing Data Stream Information</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ul>
<p>You can view the real-time data stream rate and resolution of each channel.</p>
<p>Select <strong>Main Menu ^ Info ^ BPS</strong>, the <strong>BPS </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark875"> Figure 5-246.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="888" height="500" class="wp-image-2384" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 346" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 705" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346.jpeg 888w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-346-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 888px) 100vw, 888px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark875"></a> Figure 5-246</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark876"></a> 5.20 Logout the Device</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="39" height="38" class="wp-image-2385" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-347.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 347" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 706"></p>
<p>On the top right of the Main Menu interface or on any interface after you have entered the Main</p>
<p>Menu, click</p>
<ul>
<li>Select <strong>Logout</strong>, you will log out the device.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Reboot</strong>, the Device will be rebooted.</li>
<li>Select <strong>Shutdown</strong>, the Device will be turned off.</li>
</ul>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="888" height="500" class="wp-image-2386" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 348" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 707" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348.jpeg 888w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-300x169.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-768x432.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-348-810x456.jpeg 810w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 888px) 100vw, 888px" /></p>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark878"></a> Web Operations</li>
</ol>
<ul>
<li>The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.</li>
<li>The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.</li>
<li>Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information, please refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark880"></a> Connecting to Network</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>CD NOTE</p>
<ul>
<li>The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.</li>
<li>The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, fire fox, Google on Apple PC to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device parameters configurations.</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.</p>
<p>Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details about network configuration of the Device, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">&#8220;5.1.4.4 Configuring Network</a> <a href="#post-2037-bookmark124">Settings.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p>Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using &#8220;ping ************&#8221; Usually the return value of TTL is 255.</p>
<ul>
<li>
<ol>
<li><a id="post-2037-bookmark882"></a> Logging in the Web</li>
</ol>
</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 1 Open the IE browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.</p>
<p>The Login in dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark884"> Figure 6-1.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="470" height="423" class="wp-image-2387" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 349" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 708" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349.jpeg 470w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-349-300x270.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 470px) 100vw, 470px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-1</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark884"></a> Step 2 Enter the user name and password.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="178" height="35" class="wp-image-2388" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-350.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 350" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 709"></p>
<ul>
<li>The default administrator account is <strong>admin</strong>. The password is the one that was configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep the password properly and change it regularly.</li>
<li>Click to display the password.</li>
<li>If you forgot the password, click <strong>Forgot Password? </strong>to reset the password. For details about resetting the password, see <a href="#post-2037-bookmark885">&#8220;6.3 Resetting Password.</a>&#8220;</li>
</ul>
<p>Step 3 Click <strong>Login</strong>.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark885"></a><a id="post-2037-bookmark886"></a> 6.3 Resetting Password</p>
<p>You can reset the password through the reserved email address when you forget the password of admin account.</p>
<p>Step 1 Login the Web of the Device.</p>
<p>TheLogin in dialog box is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark888"> Figure 6-2.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="41" height="33" class="wp-image-2389" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-351.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 351" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 710"></p>
<p>3 <strong>RANGÉ&#8217;</strong></p>
<p><strong>i psci Natru</strong></p>
<p><strong>Login</strong></p>
<p><strong>Cancel</strong></p>
<p>Û</p>
<p>Figure 6-2</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark888"></a> Step 2 Click <strong>Forgot Password?</strong></p>
<p>The <strong>Reset the password </strong>interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark889"> Figure 6-3.</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="896" height="615" class="wp-image-2390" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 352" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 711" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352.jpeg 896w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-300x206.jpeg 300w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-768x527.jpeg 768w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-810x556.jpeg 810w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-145x100.jpeg 145w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-352-380x260.jpeg 380w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 896px) 100vw, 896px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-3</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark889"></a> Step 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to scan the QR code and get the security code.</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="70" height="60" class="wp-image-2391" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-353.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 353" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 712"></p>
<p>CAUTION</p>
<ul>
<li>You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, please refresh the interface.</li>
<li>Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.</li>
</ul>
<p>•</p>
<p>Wrong security code entrance up to five times will cause the security code locked for five minutes. After five minutes, you can continue to use this security code.</p>
<p>Step 4 In the <strong>Security code </strong>box, enter the security code received in your reserved email box.</p>
<p>Step 5 Click <strong>Next</strong>.</p>
<p>The new password resetting interface is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark890"> Figure 6-4</a></p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="667" height="470" class="wp-image-2392" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 354" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 713" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354.jpeg 667w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-354-300x211.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 667px) 100vw, 667px" /></p>
<p>Figure 6-4</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark890"></a> Step 6 In the <strong>Password </strong>box, enter the new password and enter it again in the <strong>Confirm Password </strong>box.</p>
<p>EQ NOTE</p>
<p>The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , &#8220;;&#8221;,&#8221;:&#8221; and</p>
<p>&#8220;&amp;&#8221;).</p>
<p>Step 7 Click <strong>Save</strong>. The password resetting is started.</p>
<p>After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed to indicate the result and you will see the login interface is displayed. Then you can use the new password to login the Web.</p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark891"></a> 6.4 Introducing Web Main Menu</p>
<p>After you have logged in the Web, the main menu is displayed. See<a href="#post-2037-bookmark893"> Figure 6-5.</a></p>
<p>For detailed operations, you can refer to <a href="#post-2037-bookmark84">&#8220;5 Local Configurations.</a>&#8221;</p>
<p><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="764" height="580" class="wp-image-2393" src="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355.jpeg" alt="word image 2037 355" title="CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide 714" srcset="https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355.jpeg 764w, https://www.xvraid.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/word-image-2037-355-300x228.jpeg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 764px) 100vw, 764px" /></p>
<p><a id="post-2037-bookmark893"></a> Figure 6-5</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/cp-plus-xvr-complete-setup-guide.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>Lorex Fusion Setup Guide</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/lorex-fusion-setup-guide.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/lorex-fusion-setup-guide.html#respond</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 31 May 2023 19:18:44 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Troubleshoot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[APP Store]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[audio record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Check for Updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[client]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[connect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[download]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Firmware updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Floodlight]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google Play]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[how do]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Instruction]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ip camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Latest version]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Live View]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lorex]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lorex Home App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Motion detect]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Network]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Outdoor]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[password]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Password Reset]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[playback]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[QR code]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[record settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[security camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Security System]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[setup guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[smart home]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Storage]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[troubleshoot]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Video Doorbell]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[wi-fi camera]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Wireless]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=1390</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[What is the Lorex Fusion Collection? The Lorex Fusion Collection is a set of NVRs and wireless cameras that work together through the Lorex...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div id="s-44901dda-5965-478b-9a8a-39c259d448ca" class="shg-c shg-align-left">
<div class="shogun-heading-component">
<h2>What is the Lorex Fusion Collection?</h2>
</div>
</div>
<div id="s-99a39b97-fe36-410c-af69-57798e263109" class="shg-c ">
<div class="shg-rich-text shg-theme-text-content">
<p class="p1"><span class="s1">The Lorex Fusion Collection is a set of NVRs and wireless cameras that work together through the Lorex Home App.<span class="Apple-converted-space">  </span>It works like this: Fusion Series NVRs, which connect to wired IP Cameras, can also incorporate two Wi-Fi cameras, allowing you to record them continuously to the NVRs Hard Drive.</span></p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Troubleshooting</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following article provides some troubleshooting tips for setting up your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a>.</p>
<blockquote><p>Read Next :</p>
<ol>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/lorex-device-password-reset-guidelines.html">Lorex Device Password Reset Guidelines</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/guide/lorex-smart-home-security-center-how-to-set-up.html">Lorex Smart Home Security Center &amp;#8211; How to set up</a></li>
<li><a href="https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-lorex-devices-firmware-updates.html">How to Lorex devices firmware updates</a></li>
</ol>
</blockquote>
<hr />
<h2>My Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory is not appearing in the device list.</h2>
<ul>
<li>Ensure your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory and Fusion recorder are connected to the same Lorex Home app account. For instructions on connecting to the Lorex Home app, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3518/fusion-download-lorex-home-app" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Download the Lorex Home App</a>.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and Fusion recorder are connected to the same network.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Fusion recorder is connected to your router using the included Ethernet cable.</li>
<li>Check the recorder Ethernet cable connection. Disconnect and reconnect the Ethernet cable for your system.</li>
<li>There may be a Wi-Fi connection issue. Restart your Fusion recorder and search for your Wi-Fi device again.</li>
<li>Ensure that you are connecting a Fusion compatible Wi-Fi camera or accessory. Only Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories can connect to the Lorex Fusion recorder. For a list of compatible Fusion Wi-Fi devices, refer to the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3501/fusion-faqs" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Frequently Asked Questions</a>.</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>My Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory is not connecting to my Fusion recorder.</h2>
<ul>
<li>Give your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory a few minutes to establish a connection.</li>
<li>Check to see if your Fusion recorder has the most up-to-date firmware. <strong>New Local UI:</strong> Login to your recorder and navigate to <strong>System &gt; Update &amp; Reset &gt; Upgrade</strong>, then click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>. <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/System-Upgrade.jpg" alt="System Upgrade" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 754"> <strong>Previous Local UI:</strong> Login to your recorder and navigate to <strong>Main Menu &gt; Information &gt; Update/Reset &gt; Update</strong>, then click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>. For instructions on updating your recorder&#8217;s firmware through USB, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/1451/Client-Software-Manually-updating-DVR-NVR-firmware" target="_blank" rel="noopener">How to manually upgrade the firmware of your recorder</a>.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are powered on.</li>
<li>The same password created for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory in the Lorex Home app must be entered in your Fusion recorder. If you have forgotten the password, then reset your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory and connect it to the app again.</li>
<li>(Applies to the previous local UI only) If your password for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory is entered incorrectly in your Fusion recorder, then your Wi-Fi device will lock itself. Reset your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory and connect it to the app again.</li>
<li>Ensure that you are entering the password for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory created in the Lorex Home app, and not the Lorex Home app account password. Those are two separate passwords.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory is connected to a dual-band router (2.4 GHz/5 GHz bands).</li>
<li>Ensure that you are connecting the Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory to an available Fusion Wi-Fi channel, and not a Wi-Fi channel that already has a Wi-Fi device connected to it.</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>I don&#8217;t know the password for my Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory.</h2>
<p>If you don&#8217;t know the password for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory, then you will need to reset the device and connect it to the Lorex Home app again.</p>
<p><strong>To reset your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>While connected to a power source, press and hold the reset button on the device until you hear the reset chime.</li>
<li>Open the Lorex Home app.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Remove-Device2.jpg" alt="Tap on Settings Icon" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 755"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Tap on your Wi-Fi device&#8217;s settings (•••) icon.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Remove-Device1.jpg" alt="Tap Remove Device" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 756"></p>
<ol start="4">
<li>Tap <strong>Remove Device</strong>.</li>
<li>Connect your device to the app again.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2>I&#8217;m receiving duplicate notifications in the Lorex Home app.</h2>
<p>After completing the Fusion setup, your Wi-Fi camera or accessory is connected to the Lorex Home app twice &#8211; once as a single device and then a second time as a device connected to your recorder. To avoid receiving duplicate notifications from the same camera or accessory, you will need to <strong>Turn off Alerts</strong> for your Wi-Fi device connected to your recorder. For instructions, please see the article Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings.</p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Frequently Asked Questions</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following frequently asked questions (FAQs) provide more information about your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a>. Where applicable, the FAQ includes links to articles where you may find more information.</p>
<hr />
<h2>What is Lorex Fusion?</h2>
<p>Our Lorex Fusion recorders incorporate the newest (fusion) technology to connect both wired and Wi-Fi cameras, doorbells, floodlights, and motion sensors to one system. Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories can connect to one recorder for continuous 24/7 recording and local, secure storage (up to 10TB). Everything can be accessed from your <a href="https://www.lorextechnology.com/articles/Lorex-Home-Mobile-App" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Home app</a> for easy control of all devices.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/FAQ.jpg" alt="Fusion" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 757"></p>
<hr />
<h2>Which recorders are part of Fusion?</h2>
<p>For a list of Fusion recorders, see the <a href="https://www.lorex.com/pages/compatibility?dt=Apps%20&amp;%20Software&amp;dp=301" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Product Compatibility Chart</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Can I connect all Lorex Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to my Fusion recorder?</h2>
<p>Only Fusion compatible Wi-Fi devices can connect to Fusion recorders.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Which Wi-Fi cameras and accessories are part of Fusion?</h2>
<p>See the following list of Fusion Wi-Fi devices:</p>
<ul>
<li>Lorex 2K Pan-Tilt Outdoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/lorex-2k-pan-tilt-outdoor-wi-fi-security-camera?variant=41567181635734" target="_blank" rel="noopener">F461AQD</a>)</li>
<li>2K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/2k-spotlight-indoor-outdoor-wi-fi-security-camera" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W482CAD</a>)</li>
<li>2K Wi-Fi Video Doorbell (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/2k-wi-fi-video-doorbell-with-person-detection-wired" target="_blank" rel="noopener">B451AJD</a>)</li>
<li>2K Indoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/2k-indoor-wi-fi-security-camera" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W461ASC</a>)</li>
<li>2K Pan-Tilt Indoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/2k-pan-tilt-indoor-wi-fi-security-camera" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W462AQC</a>)</li>
<li>Smart Sensor Starter Kit with 2 Sensors (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/smart-sensor-starter-kit-with-2-sensors" target="_blank" rel="noopener">AY41TR-KTK1-MTK1</a>)</li>
<li>Smart Indoor/Outdoor 1080p Wi-Fi Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/smart-indoor-outdoor-1080p-wi-fi-camera-with-smart-deterrence-and-color-night-vision" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W282CAD</a>)</li>
<li>1080p Wi-Fi Floodlight Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/1080p-wi-fi-floodlight-camera" target="_blank" rel="noopener">V261LCD</a>)</li>
<li>1080p Wi-Fi Video Doorbell (<a href="https://www.lorextechnology.com/site/LNWDB1-1-p" target="_blank" rel="noopener">LNWDB1</a>)</li>
<li>1080p Full HD Smart Indoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorextechnology.com/hd-security-cameras/1080p-hd-wifi-camera/W261ASC-E-1-p" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W261ASC</a>)</li>
<li>1080p Full HD Smart Indoor Wi-Fi Pan-Tilt Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorex.com/products/1080p-full-hd-smart-indoor-wi-fi-pan-tilt-security-camera" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W261AQC</a>)</li>
<li>Smart Outdoor Wi-Fi Security Camera (<a href="https://www.lorextechnology.com/hd-ip-camera/1080p-active-deterrence-wifi-camera/W281AA-W-1-p" target="_blank" rel="noopener">W281AA</a>)</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>Should I update my Fusion recorder&#8217;s firmware?</h2>
<p>It is recommended to update your system firmware to the latest version to ensure remote connectivity and to support newly added Fusion Wi-Fi devices.</p>
<ul>
<li>New Local UI: Login to your recorder and navigate to <strong>System &gt; Update &amp; Reset &gt; Upgrade</strong>, then click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>.</li>
</ul>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/System-Upgrade.jpg" alt="System Upgrade" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 754"></p>
<ul>
<li>Previous Local UI: Login to your recorder and navigate to <strong>Main Menu &gt; Information &gt; Update/Reset &gt; Update</strong>, then click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>. For instructions on updating your recorder&#8217;s firmware through USB, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/1451/Client-Software-Manually-updating-DVR-NVR-firmware" target="_blank" rel="noopener">How to manually upgrade the firmware of your recorder</a>.</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>Does my Fusion recorder require a network setup?</h2>
<p>Yes, a network setup is required to connect Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to your Fusion recorder. <strong>Ensure you connect the included Ethernet cable to your recorder&#8217;s LAN port and your router.</strong></p>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Ethernet3.jpg" alt="Network Setup" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 759"></p>
<hr />
<h2>Does it matter which router I use?</h2>
<p>Yes, due to its strong signal, the dual-band router is suitable for high resolution video recording and for connectivity between devices. Ensure that your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are all connected to a dual-band router (2.4 GHz/5 GHz bands).</p>
<hr />
<h2>How many Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories can I connect to my Fusion recorder?</h2>
<p>This depends on your Fusion recorder and the number of Fusion Wi-Fi channels it comes with. For full technical specifications, refer to the <strong>Product Specifications</strong> on your recorder&#8217;s product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</p>
<hr />
<h2>What is a Fusion Wi-Fi channel?</h2>
<p>A Fusion Wi-Fi channel is the channel you use to add a single Fusion Wi-Fi camera to your system. A 16-channel security system with 8 PoE ports/channels (for wired camera connection) and 8 Fusion Wi-Fi channels means that 8 Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories can connect to the entire system.</p>
<p>Note: Fusion Wi-Fi channel&#8217;s are only available on certain Lorex Fusion recorders. For a list of Fusion recorders, see the <a href="https://www.lorex.com/pages/compatibility?dt=Apps%20&amp;%20Software&amp;dp=301" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Product Compatibility Chart</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How many Fusion Wi-Fi channels are on my Fusion recorder?</h2>
<p>The number of Fusion Wi-Fi channels varies per Fusion recorder. For full technical specifications, refer to the <strong>Product Specifications</strong> on your recorder&#8217;s product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How do I setup my Lorex Fusion system?</h2>
<p>Complete your Fusion setup in the following order:</p>
<ol>
<li><strong>Setup your Fusion recorder and wired cameras</strong></li>
<li><a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3501/(https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3518/fusion-download-lorex-home-app)" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>Download the Lorex Home App</strong></a></li>
<li><strong>Connect your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories</strong> &#8211; See the <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3691/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras-new" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>new local UI</strong></a> or the <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3504/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>previous local UI</strong></a> instructions</li>
</ol>
<p>After connecting your Fusion system, ensure you <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3674/fusion-adjust-settings" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>adjust your Fusion settings</strong></a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Are there Fusion setup tutorial videos?</h2>
<p>For a video walk-through of the Fusion setup with the <strong>new local UI</strong>, please watch <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zZ9uEHmtR3Q" target="_blank" rel="noopener">here</a>.</p>
<p>For a video walk-through of the Fusion setup with the <strong>previous local UI</strong>, please watch <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nR97gfJl9TI" target="_blank" rel="noopener">here</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How do I setup my Fusion recorder and wired cameras?</h2>
<p>For Basic System Setup instructions, refer to your recorder&#8217;s <strong>Quick Start Guide</strong> or <strong>Series Manual</strong> on the product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How do I connect my Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory to my Fusion recorder?</h2>
<p>For setup instructions using the new local UI, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3691/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras-new" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories (New Local UI)</strong></a>.</p>
<p>For setup instructions using the previous local UI, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3504/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Which password should I enter to connect my Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory to my Fusion recorder?</h2>
<p>Enter the same password that you created in the Lorex Home app when setting up your Fusion Wi-Fi device.</p>
<hr />
<h2>What is continuous recording?</h2>
<p>Once your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi camera connects to your Fusion recorder, your camera&#8217;s recording settings are automatically set to continuous. This means that your Fusion Wi-Fi camera will record 24/7 or for the entire duration of the recording schedule onto your Fusion recorder&#8217;s hard drive. It is worth noting that recordings on the camera are limited due to the size of its onboard storage, while recordings on the recorder are extensive (3TB to 10TB). Continuous recording captures everything in the background, and you can playback to catch anything you missed.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How do I set my Fusion Wi-Fi camera to continuous recording?</h2>
<p>After Fusion setup, your Wi-Fi camera is automatically set to <strong>Continuous</strong> recording. To adjust your camera&#8217;s recording settings, login to your recorder and navigate to the devices menu. For instructions, please see the article Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings.</p>
<hr />
<h2>How come I&#8217;m receiving duplicate notifications in the Lorex Home app?</h2>
<p>After completing the Fusion setup, your Wi-Fi camera or accessory is connected to the Lorex Home app twice &#8211; once as a single device and then a second time as a device connected to your recorder. To avoid receiving duplicate notifications from the same camera or accessory, you will need to <strong>Turn off Alerts</strong> for your Wi-Fi device connected to your recorder. For instructions, please see the article Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings.</p>
<hr />
<h2>After Fusion setup, where is my Wi-Fi camera&#8217;s video footage being stored?</h2>
<p>Your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi camera saves recorded motion detection videos onto the local microSD card (not always included). Once you&#8217;ve connected your Fusion Wi-Fi camera to your Fusion recorder, your camera&#8217;s recording settings is automatically set to 24/7 <strong>Continuous</strong> recording, and all recorded video is stored on your recorder&#8217;s extensive hard drive (up to 10TB).</p>
<hr />
<h2>What features are supported in my recorder vs. the Lorex Home app?</h2>
<p>Please see the following list of features supported in either your Fusion recorder and/or the Lorex Home app:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Live View:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Notifications:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Playback:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Backup:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Change Channel Name:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Motion Zones:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Person Detection:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Vehicle Detection:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>White Light:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Smart Track:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Audio Recording:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Continuous Recording:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Motion Recording:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Smart Recording:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Storage:</strong> App &amp; Recorder</li>
<li><strong>Night Vision:</strong> App only</li>
<li><strong>Siren:</strong> App only</li>
<li><strong>Audio Recording:</strong> App only</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>Can I use my web browser to access my camera?</h2>
<p>You can only access your camera on the Lorex Home app, recorder, or on the Lorex Cloud Client.</p>
<hr />
<h2>When modifying the password in the Lorex Cloud Client, which password should I enter?</h2>
<p>Enter the password for your Wi-Fi camera or accessory created in the Lorex Home app during setup.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Where can I order the Lorex Fusion Collection?</h2>
<p>To order, go to <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">lorex.com</a>.</p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Download the Lorex Home App</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following article provides instructions for downloading the Lorex Home app and connecting your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a> recorder to the app.</p>
<h2>Prerequisite</h2>
<p><strong>Before you start, your Fusion recorder must be powered on and connected to your router using the included Ethernet cable.</strong> For Basic System Setup instructions, refer to your Fusion recorder&#8217;s <strong>Quick Start Guide</strong> or <strong>Manual</strong> on the product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Download the Lorex Home app</h2>
<ol>
<li>Download the <strong>Lorex Home app</strong> from the <a href="https://apps.apple.com/ca/app/lorex-home/id1342829120" target="_blank" rel="noopener">App Store</a> or <a href="https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.mm.android.lorex&amp;hl=en_CA&amp;gl=US" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Google Play</a>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/App.jpg" alt="Lorex Home App" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 760"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>Open the app and create an account.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Add-Device.jpg" alt="Tap to add your first device" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 761"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Tap the add (<strong>+</strong>) icon to connect your Fusion recorder.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Scan-Device.jpg" alt="Scan the Recorder&#039;s QR Code" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 762"></p>
<ol start="4">
<li>Scan your Fusion recorder&#8217;s QR code. The QR Code is located on your Fusion recorder alongside the <strong>Device ID</strong>, which can also be accessed from your recorder by pressing the <strong>Info</strong> button.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Info-button.jpg" alt="Info Button" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 763"> <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Info2.jpg" alt="Scan the Recorder&#039;s QR Code" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 764"></p>
<ol start="5">
<li>Follow the in-app steps to complete the Fusion recorder setup.</li>
</ol>
<p>Once your Fusion recorder has connected to the Lorex Home app, complete the final Fusion steps by connecting your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories.</p>
<p>For setup instructions using the new local UI, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3691/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras-new" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories (New Local UI)</strong></a>.</p>
<p>For setup instructions using the previous local UI, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3504/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories</a>.</p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories (New Local UI)</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following article provides instructions for connecting your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a> Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to the Lorex Home app and to your Fusion recorder.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> These Fusion instructions apply to the new local UI only. For Fusion instructions that apply to the previous local UI, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3504/fusion-connect-wifi-cameras" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Before you start</h2>
<ol>
<li>Setup your Fusion recorder and wired cameras. For Basic System Setup instructions, refer to your recorder&#8217;s <strong>Quick Start Guide</strong> or <strong>Manual</strong> on the product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</li>
<li>Download the Lorex Home app. For instructions on downloading the app, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3518/fusion-download-lorex-home-app" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Download the Lorex Home App</a>.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2>Watch the Lorex Fusion setup tutorial video</h2>
<p>For a video walk-through of the fusion setup, please watch [here]().</p>
<hr />
<h2>Connect your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to the Lorex Home App</h2>
<p>Follow the Lorex Home app steps to add your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories. Refer to your camera’s documentation at <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> for detailed setup instructions. Search your camera’s model number to access the product support page.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure that your Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are connected to the Lorex Home app, and <strong>on the same app account</strong>.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are connected to the same network.</li>
<li>Save your device password for your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Open the <strong>Lorex Home app</strong> and login.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/App.jpg" alt="Lorex Home App" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 760"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>In-app, tap the <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Pair.jpg" alt="Add+" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 766"> icon to add your Wi-Fi camera.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Scan-Device.jpg" alt="Scan the camera&#039;s device QR Code" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 767"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Power on your Fusion Wi-Fi camera and scan the camera’s Device QR code.</li>
<li>Follow the in-app steps to complete the setup.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2>Connect your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to your Fusion recorder</h2>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> You can add one Wi-Fi camera or accessory to one Fusion Wi-Fi channel. The number of Fusion Wi-Fi channels varies per Fusion recorder. For full technical specifications, refer to the <strong>Product Specifications</strong> on your recorder&#8217;s product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</p>
<ol>
<li>Login to your Fusion recorder using the system user name (default: <strong>admin</strong>) and your new, secure password.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion1.jpg" alt="Add+" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 768"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>From the Live View display, click the pair icon <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Recorder-pair.jpg" alt="+" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 769"> from the center of the Fusion Wi-Fi channel.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion2.jpg" alt="Device Search" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 770"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion--3.jpg" alt="Select Device" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 771"></p>
<ol start="4">
<li>Double-click on your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory to add it.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion---4.jpg" alt="Enter Device Password" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 772"></p>
<ol start="5">
<li>Right-click to exit the screen, then enter your Wi-Fi device password created in-app.</li>
</ol>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> If your Lorex Fusion recorder and Fusion Wi-Fi camera share the same password, then the devices will automatically connect without entering the password.</p>
<ol start="6">
<li>Give your Fusion Wi-Fi camera a few minutes to establish a connection.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<p>After successfully connecting to your Fusion recorder, your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory connection status turns green. For any connection issues, see the article Lorex Fusion: Troubleshooting.</p>
<p>To turn off duplicate notifications, adjust your camera&#8217;s recording settings, or link motion sensors to cameras, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3674/fusion-adjust-settings" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings</a>.</p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following article provides instructions for connecting your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a> Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to the Lorex Home app and to your Fusion recorder.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong> These Fusion instructions apply to the previous local UI only. For Fusion instructions that apply to the new local UI, please see the article Lorex Fusion: Connect Your Wi-Fi Cameras and Accessories (New Local UI).</p>
<hr />
<h2>Before you start</h2>
<ul>
<li>Setup your Fusion recorder and wired cameras. For Basic System Setup instructions, refer to your recorder&#8217;s <strong>Quick Start Guide</strong> or <strong>Manual</strong> on the product support page. Visit <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/" target="_blank" rel="noopener">help.lorextechnology.com</a> and search your Fusion recorder&#8217;s model number.</li>
<li>Download the Lorex Home app. For instructions on downloading the app, see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3518/fusion-download-lorex-home-app" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Download the Lorex Home App</a>.</li>
</ul>
<hr />
<h2>Watch the Lorex Fusion setup tutorial video</h2>
<p>For a video walk-through of the Fusion setup, please watch <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nR97gfJl9TI" target="_blank" rel="noopener">here</a>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Connect your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to the Lorex Home App</h2>
<p>Follow the Lorex Home app steps to add your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories. Refer to your camera’s documentation at help.lorextechnology.com for detailed setup instructions. Search your camera’s model number to access the product support page.</p>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>Ensure that your Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are connected to the Lorex Home app, and <strong>on the same app account</strong>.</li>
<li>Ensure that your Wi-Fi cameras and accessories and your Fusion recorder are connected to the same network.</li>
<li>Ensure that you save your device password for your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Open the <strong>Lorex Home app</strong> and login.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/App.jpg" alt="Lorex Home App" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 760"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>In-app, tap the <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Pair.jpg" alt="Add+" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 766"> icon to add your Wi-Fi camera.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Scan-Device.jpg" alt="Scan the camera&#039;s device QR Code" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 767"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Power on your Fusion Wi-Fi camera and scan the camera’s Device QR code.</li>
<li>Follow the in-app steps to complete the setup.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2>Connect your Fusion Wi-Fi cameras and accessories to your Fusion recorder</h2>
<p><strong>Note:</strong></p>
<ul>
<li>You can connect up to two Fusion Wi-Fi devices on two of the recorder channels. Ensure you have two channels available. For more information, please see the article <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3501/fusion-faqs" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion: Frequently Asked Questions</a>.</li>
</ul>
<ol>
<li>Login to your Fusion recorder using the system user name (default: <strong>admin</strong>) and your new, secure password.</li>
<li>From the Live View display, right-click to open the Quick Menu, then click <strong>Camera Registration</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion-1.jpg" alt="Camera Registration - Device Search and Add" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 776"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Click <strong>Device Search</strong>.</li>
<li>Check the box that corresponds with your Wi-Fi device, then click <strong>Add</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion-2.jpg" alt="Camera Registration - Edit" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 777"></p>
<ol start="5">
<li>Once your Wi-Fi device has moved to the Added Device list, click the pencil icon underneath <strong>Edit</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion-3.8.jpg" alt="Camera Registration - Wi-Fi Device Password" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 778"></p>
<ol start="6">
<li>Enter your Wi-Fi device&#8217;s password and click <strong>Connect</strong>.</li>
<li>Then, click <strong>OK</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Fusion-4.jpg" alt="Camera Registration - Camera status connected " title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 779"></p>
<p>After successfully connecting to your Fusion recorder, your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory connection status turns green. For any connection issues, see the article Lorex Fusion: Troubleshooting.</p>
<p>To turn off duplicate notifications, adjust your camera&#8217;s recording settings, or link motion sensors to cameras, see the article Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings.</p>
<div class="row">
<div class="col-sm-12 mt-3">
<h1>Lorex Fusion: Adjust Settings</h1>
</div>
</div>
<div class="col-xs-12">
<p>The following article provides instructions for adjusting your <a href="https://www.lorex.com/collections/the-fusion-collection" target="_blank" rel="noopener">Lorex Fusion Collection</a> settings.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Turn off duplicate notifications</h2>
<p>After completing the Fusion setup, your Wi-Fi camera or accessory is connected to the Lorex Home app twice &#8211; once as a single device and then a second time as a device connected to your recorder. To avoid receiving duplicate notifications from the same camera or accessory, you will need to <strong>Turn off Alerts</strong> for your Wi-Fi device connected to your recorder.</p>
<p><strong>To turn off duplicate notifications:</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>Open the <strong>Lorex Home app</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/App-1.jpg" alt="Devices Screen" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 780"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>Under your Fusion recorder, swipe left to find your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory.</li>
<li>Tap on your Fusion Wi-Fi device’s notification icon <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Notifications1.jpg" alt="Notification Icon" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 781">.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/App-2.jpg" alt="Turn off Alerts" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 782">.</p>
<ol start="4">
<li>Tap on <strong>Turn off Alerts</strong>, and then <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<hr />
<h2>Adjust the recording settings for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory</h2>
<p>After Fusion setup, your Lorex Fusion Wi-Fi camera’s recording settings will automatically adjust to <strong>Continuous</strong>, recording 24/7 directly to your recorder’s hard disk drive.</p>
<p><strong>To adjust the recording settings (new local UI):</strong></p>
<ol>
<li>From the Live View display, right-click to open the Quick Menu, then click <strong>Main Menu</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>Devices</strong>, then <strong>Record Settings</strong>. Click the <strong>Record Settings</strong> tab from the side panel.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Record-Settings.jpg" alt="Record Settings" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 783"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Under <strong>Channel</strong>, select your Wi-Fi device.</li>
<li>Under <strong>Type</strong>, select the recording type.
<ul>
<li><strong>Continuous:</strong> The video will record automatically according to the time on the schedule.</li>
<li><strong>MD (Motion Detection):</strong> The video will record when motion is detected.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>To adjust the recording settings using the previous local UI, navigate to <strong>Main Menu &gt; CAMERA &gt; Recording &gt; Recording</strong> and follow the same steps as above.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Set the recording schedule for your Fusion Wi-Fi camera or accessory</h2>
<p>You can set a custom recording schedule according to your needs. For example, you can set the system to record continuously during business hours and record on motion detection only outside of business hours.</p>
<ol>
<li>From the Live View display, right-click to open the Quick Menu, then click <strong>Main Menu</strong>.</li>
<li>Click <strong>System</strong>, then <strong>Storage</strong>. Click the <strong>Schedule</strong> tab from the side panel.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Schedule1.jpg" alt="Recording Schedule" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 784"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Under <strong>Channel</strong>, select your Wi-Fi device.</li>
<li>Check the recording type you would like to adjust, or check <strong>All</strong>.</li>
<li>Adjust the recording schedule as needed:
<ul>
<li>Click-and-drag on each day to customize the recording schedule. The schedule is set up as a grid, with each block representing two hours.</li>
<li>Click <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/icon-1.jpg" alt="Weekday" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 785"> beside 2 or more days to link schedules (<img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/icon-2.jpg" alt="Linked Weekdays" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 786">). This allows you to quickly change multiple schedules at once.</li>
<li>To make fine adjustments to a schedule, click <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/icon-3.jpg" alt="Set Time" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 787">. This will allow you to set exact start and end times for a schedule.</li>
<li>To disable all recording of the selected type on the selected day, click <img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/icon_4.jpg" alt="Modify" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 788">.</li>
</ul>
</li>
<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p>To set the recording schedule using the previous local UI, navigate to <strong>Main Menu &gt; STORAGE &gt; Schedule</strong> and follow the same steps as above.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Link sensors to cameras</h2>
<p>Once you&#8217;ve completed the Fusion setup, you can link motion and door/window sensors to any compatible camera, so that when the sensors are triggered the linked automatically cameras record.</p>
<ol>
<li>Open the Lorex Home app.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Devices-Screen-Sensors-1.jpg" alt="Sensor Hub" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 789"></p>
<ol start="2">
<li>Tap on the Sensor Hub&#8217;s connected sensors list (•••) icon.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Sensors-List.jpg" alt="Connected Sensors" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 790"></p>
<ol start="3">
<li>Tap on the sensor that you want to link.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Sensors-Device-Settings.jpg" alt="Sensors Device Settings" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 791"></p>
<ol start="4">
<li>Tap on <strong>Link Camera</strong>.</li>
</ol>
<p><img decoding="async" src="http://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/SHEILASPAGE/Fusion/Link-Camera-1.jpg" alt="Select Camera" title="Lorex Fusion Setup Guide 792"></p>
<ol start="5">
<li>Tap on the camera that you want to link.</li>
<li>Tap <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
</div>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/guide/lorex-fusion-setup-guide.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>How to Lorex devices firmware updates</title>
		<link>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-lorex-devices-firmware-updates.html</link>
					<comments>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-lorex-devices-firmware-updates.html#comments</comments>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[XVR AiD]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Fri, 11 Feb 2022 19:50:35 +0000</pubDate>
				<category><![CDATA[Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[How To]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Check for Updates]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Cloud Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Device Settings]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware relase]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[firmware update]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[guide]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[how to firmware upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[latest firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Latest version]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lorex]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Lorex Home App]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[new firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[NVR Cloud]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Product firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Required Firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrade]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Upgrading firmware]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[USB flash drive]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[USB Upgrade]]></category>
		<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.xvraid.com/?p=30</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[In this article, we will walk you through the process of checking your Lorex devices for available firmware updates. If there is an available...]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>In this article, we will walk you through the process of <strong><em>checking</em></strong> your Lorex devices for available firmware updates. If there is an available update for your device, we highly encourage you to update the firmware on your device. To do this, you must have access to the internet. To manually update the firmware, please check our guide <strong>here</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> If you are unable to verify the status of your device&#8217;s firmware, please call our Technical Support at <strong>1-888-425-6739</strong>.</p>
<h2>Recorder</h2>
<p>To check if you have the latest firmware on your recorder, please follow these steps:</p>
<p><strong>Step 1.</strong> Go to <strong>Main Menu</strong> &gt; <strong>Settings</strong> &gt; <strong>System</strong> &gt; <strong>Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2.</strong> In the <strong>Upgrade</strong> settings, click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Check%20for%20Updates.png" alt="Check for Updates" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 804"></p>
<p><strong>Step 3.</strong> If there is an available update for your recorder, please proceed with upgrading your firmware. If not, you will get a message that you have the latest firmware.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Latest%20version.png" alt="Latest version" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 805"></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To receive automatic updates, make sure the box is checked next to <strong>Automatically Check for Updates</strong>, then click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
<h2>Lorex Home App</h2>
<p>To check if you have the latest firmare on your Lorex Home app, please follow these steps:</p>
<p><strong>Step 1.</strong> Launch the <strong>Lorex Home</strong> app.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2.</strong> Tap <strong>more</strong> or the <strong>three dots</strong> to go to <strong>Device Settings</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/miscellaneous/device_settings_final2.png" alt="device settings" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 806"></p>
<p><strong>Step 3.</strong> Tap <strong>Firmware</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/miscellaneous/firmware_final1.png" alt="firmware" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 807"></p>
<p><strong>Step 4.</strong> If there is an available update, please proceed with upgrading your firmware. If there is no new firmware available, the <strong>Latest version</strong> will just be <strong>empty</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/miscellaneous/latest_version_final1.png" alt="latest version" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 808"></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> All Lorex firmware updates are free of charge.</p>
<p>There are two ways of upgrading the firmware of your recorder: <strong>USB Upgrade</strong> and <strong>Cloud Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Part 1 &#8211; USB Upgrade</h2>
<p>For this procedure, you need (1) the latest <strong>firmware</strong> for your recorder, (2) a formatted and empty <strong>USB flash drive</strong>, (3) access to a <strong>computer</strong> with <strong>internet connection</strong>, and (4) a valid <strong>email address</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Step 1.</strong> To upgrade your recorder to the latest firmware, call our <strong>Technical Support</strong> at <strong>1-888-425-6739</strong> and request for your recorder&#8217;s latest firmware. When calling, make sure you have your recorder&#8217;s the correct <strong>model number</strong> and a valid <strong>email address</strong> at hand. We will send the firmware download link via email. <strong>NOTE:</strong> The download link will expire in a specified period of time.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2.</strong> Next, format your empty USB flash drive using your recorder. <strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> We highly recommend that you format your USB flash drive <strong>using your recorder</strong>. To format your USB flash drive using your recorder, please read the full instructions <a href="https://help.lorextechnology.com/link/portal/57356/57366/Article/3527/dvr-nvr-how-format-your-usb-flash-drive-your-recorder" target="_blank" rel="noopener"><strong>here</strong></a>.</p>
<p><strong>Step 3.</strong> Once you have successfully formatted your USB flash drive, remove it and insert it into your computer&#8217;s USB port and download the firmware we sent via email.</p>
<p><strong>Step 4.</strong> Verify that you have the <strong>correct firmware</strong>, then <strong>remove</strong> the USB flash drive from your computer, and <strong>insert</strong> it back into one of the USB ports on your recorder.</p>
<p><strong>Step 5.</strong> On your recorder, go to <strong>Main Menu</strong> &gt; <strong>Settings</strong> &gt; <strong>System</strong> &gt; <strong>Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Step 6.</strong> In the <strong>Upgrade</strong> settings, click <strong>USB Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/USB-upgrade.png" alt="USB Upgrade" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 809"></p>
<p><strong>Step 7.</strong> In the popup window, select the <strong>firmware</strong> that you have previously downloaded for your recorder.</p>
<p><strong>NOTE:</strong> Make sure to select the file with <strong>.bin</strong> extension. See image below.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Select-firmware.png" alt="Select firmware" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 810"></p>
<p><strong>Step 8.</strong> Then, at the bottom of the screen, click <strong>Start</strong> to begin the upgrade.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Click-start.png" alt="Click start" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 811"></p>
<p><strong>WARNING:</strong> Please <strong>DO NOT</strong> turn off the power during the firmware upgrade. Wait until the unit reboots and display the new live view.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Do-not-turn-off.png" alt="Warning" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 812"></p>
<p><strong>Congratulations!</strong> You have successfully updated the firmware of your recorder.</p>
<hr />
<h2>Part 2 &#8211; Cloud Upgrade</h2>
<p>To upgrade your recorder&#8217;s firmware via <strong>Cloud Upgrade</strong>, it is necessary to connect the recorder to your network.</p>
<p><strong>Step 1.</strong> Go to <strong>Main Menu</strong> &gt; <strong>Settings</strong> &gt; <strong>System</strong> &gt; <strong>Upgrade</strong>.</p>
<p><strong>Step 2.</strong> In the <strong>Upgrade</strong> settings, click <strong>Check for Updates</strong>.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Check%20for%20Updates.png" alt="Check for Updates" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 804"></p>
<p><strong>Step 3.</strong> If there is an available update for your recorder, please proceed with upgrading your firmware. If not, you will get a message that you have the latest firmware.</p>
<p><img decoding="async" class="screenshot" src="https://www.lorextechnology.com/images/supportimages/supportarticles/manual-update/Latest%20version.png" alt="Latest version" title="How to Lorex devices firmware updates 805"></p>
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> To receive automatic updates, make sure the box is checked next to <strong>Automatically Check for Updates</strong>, then click <strong>OK</strong>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
					<wfw:commentRss>https://www.xvraid.com/firmware/how-to-lorex-devices-firmware-updates.html/feed</wfw:commentRss>
			<slash:comments>10</slash:comments>
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
